operator's manual vn, vhd - · pdf fileoperator's manual vn, vhd. ... electrical...

389
OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD

Upload: vanngoc

Post on 21-Mar-2018

233 views

Category:

Documents


7 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

OPERATOR'S MANUALVN, VHD

Page 2: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

ForewordThis manual contains information concerning the safe operation of yourvehicle. It is extremely important that this information is read andunderstood before the vehicle is operated. This manual also containsa considerable amount of information concerning the vehicle, such asvehicle identification, Preventive Maintenance recommendations and alog for your service records. Please keep this in the vehicle at all times.Information from other component manufacturers is supplied in separatemanuals in the Owner’s Package.

Note: It is important that this manual stays with the vehicle when itis sold. Important safety information must be passed on to the newcustomer. The service information contained in this manual gives theowner important information about maintaining the vehicle but is notintended as a substitute for the Preventive Maintenance Service Manualand must not be regarded as such.

The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) andVolvo Trucks North America, Inc. should be informed immediately ifyou believe that the vehicle has a defect that could cause a vehicleaccident, injury or death.

Contact NHTSA by calling the Auto Safety Hotline at 1 (800) 424–9393or 1 (888) 327–4236. Send written complaints to: NHTSA, U.S.Department of Transportation, Washington, DC 20590.

Volvo Trucks North America, Inc.Greensboro, NC USA

Order number: PV776-20570119

© 2004 Volvo Trucks North America, Inc., Greensboro, NC USA

All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced,stored in retrieval system, or transmitted in any forms by any means,electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, withoutthe prior written permission of Volvo Trucks North America, Inc..

Page 3: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

ContentsGeneral Information .............................. 1

Information for the Owner .................... 1General Safety Information ................... 5Modifications to Vehicle ...................... 13Exhaust and Noise Emissions .............. 14Vehicle Data ....................................... 31

Identification and Labels ................... 31

Vehicle Access ....................................... 34Cab Doors and Door Lock ................... 34Central Locking ................................... 39Cab Entry and Exit .............................. 41Luggage Compartment VN ................. 52Hood VN, VHD ................................... 53

Pre-Trip Inspection and DailyMaintenance ......................................... 55

General ................................................ 55Pre-Trip Inspection Quick List ............ 56Daily Maintenance .............................. 69

Additional Safety Features .................. 73Safety Belts .......................................... 73SRS Airbag .......................................... 86Safety Equipment ................................ 93VORAD Collision Warning System .... 94

Instruments and Controls ................... 95Dash Overview VN ............................. 96Dash Overview VHD ........................... 98Dash Switches ................................... 100

Steering Column Switches .............. 111Steering Wheel Controls ................. 112Pneumatic Switches ........................ 113Driving Light Controls .................... 116Miscellaneous Switches .................. 118Optional Switches ........................... 119

Instrument Cluster Overview ............ 120High Level Cluster .......................... 120

Mid Level Cluster ........................... 121Basic Level Cluster ......................... 122

Gauges ............................................... 123Secondary Gauge ............................... 129Display Symbols ................................ 130

Alarm, Check and InformationSymbols ........................................... 130Status Symbols ................................ 132Other Symbols ................................ 132Messages, General .......................... 133Stop, Check, Info Symbols andAssociated Icons ............................. 137Acknowledging Messages ............... 139

Driver Information Display (DID) ... 143DID, General ..................................... 143

Stalk Switch Control Lever ............. 145DID Menu .......................................... 146DID Structure, Driving Mode ............ 147DID Structure, Non Driving Mode .... 161Performance Bonus Feature .............. 189

Heating and Air Conditioning .......... 191General .............................................. 191Air Conditioning Electronic ClimateControl (ECC) ................................... 191

Recirculation ................................... 191Temperature Control Settings ECC . 192Air Distribution ............................... 195

Air Conditioning Manual ClimateControl (MCC) .................................. 197

Recirculation ................................... 197Temperature Control Settings MCC 198Air Distribution ............................... 200

Heater Only ....................................... 201Recirculation ................................... 201Air Distribution ............................... 203

Cab Ventilation .................................. 204

Page 4: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Cab Ventilation Sleepers ................... 205Sleeper Climate Unit VN .................. 206Cab Air Filters ................................... 208Sleeper Control Panel (SleeperModels Only) ..................................... 209

Sleeper Controls .............................. 210Parking Heater (Optional, SleeperModels Only) ..................................... 217

Seats ..................................................... 219General .............................................. 219

Driver Seats ..................................... 219Passenger Seats ............................... 219

Isringhausen Standard Seat ............... 220Isringhausen Comfort Seat ................ 221Isringhausen Deluxe Seat VN 780Only ................................................... 222National Standard .............................. 224National Comfort Seats ..................... 225

National Bench Passenger Seat ....... 226Passenger Seats .................................. 227

Isringhausen ToolBox PassengerSeat .................................................. 227Isringhausen StaticPassenger Seat(Tubular Frame) .............................. 228No Passenger Seat (Optional) ......... 228

Cab Interior and Sleeper ................... 229Sleeper Bunks .................................... 229Storage Compartments ...................... 236Interior Lights VN, VHD .................. 242Sleeper Compartment Sink ................ 244Miscellaneous Cab Equipment .......... 248

Cup Holders and TrashCompartment ................................... 248Curtains ........................................... 249

Smoke Detector, VN (Optional) ........ 250

Communication and Entertainment 251Antennas ............................................ 251Stereo/Radio ...................................... 254

Television .......................................... 255Communication Equipment ............... 257

Fuel Economy Driving ....................... 258Fuel Economy .................................... 258

Engine Start and Operation .............. 265Starting the Engine ............................ 265Cold Weather Start and Operation ..... 270Engine Operation ............................... 277Cruise Control ................................... 286Fuel Tank(s) ....................................... 288

Clutch and Transmission ................... 290Clutch ................................................ 290

Brakes ................................................. 291Brakes ................................................ 291

General ............................................ 292Brake System Controls .................... 295Antilock Braking System (ABS) .... 306Traction Control System (TCS)(Optional) ........................................ 308Vehicle Speed Retarding Devices ... 309Too Cold for Engine Brake (VolvoEngine Only) ................................... 312

Electrical System ................................ 315Electrical System ............................... 315

General Safety Guidelines .............. 315Charging System ............................. 317Battery Box Access for Jump Start . 317Batteries, Access and Charging ...... 318Battery Jump Starting and Charging 319Battery to Battery Charging ............ 320Battery, Low State of Charge .......... 320Welding ........................................... 321Battery Voltage Protection System . 324Battery VoltageProtection System(Optional) ........................................ 324Electrical Center .............................. 325CB Power Studs .............................. 327

Page 5: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

12 Volt Power Outlets ..................... 32812 Volt Locations ............................ 329Inverter Switch - 12 V DC to 120 VAC ................................................... 330120 Volt System and Outlets ........... 331Changing Headlight Bulb, VNM .... 334Changing Headlight Bulb, VNL ..... 335

Power Steering ................................... 336General .............................................. 336

Axles and Wheels ............................... 338Axles .................................................. 338Wheels ............................................... 342

Fifth Wheel Instructions ................... 345Fifth WheelGeneral Information ....... 345

Safety Information .......................... 347Fifth Wheel ........................................ 348

Fifth Wheel Slider (Optional) ............ 349Unlocking the Fifth Wheel ................ 350Trailer Coupling Procedures .............. 352Trailer Uncoupling Procedures .......... 357Operating the Fifth Wheel Slider ...... 362

Emergency Information .................... 364Towing Procedure .............................. 364

Towing Pintle .................................. 368Towing Procedure — AIRTEK®

Suspension ...................................... 370

Service Information ........................... 374Service Assistance and Manuals ....... 374

Index .................................................... 377

Page 6: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Warning Label InformationIMPORTANT

Before driving this vehicle, be certain that you have read and thatyou fully understand each and every step of the driving and handlinginformation in this Operator’s Manual. Be certain that you fullyunderstand and follow all safety warnings. It is extremely importantthat this information is read and understood before the vehicle isoperated.

IT IS IMPORTANT THAT THEFOLLOWING INFORMATIONCONCERNING LABELS BE READ,UNDERSTOOD AND ALWAYSFOLLOWED.

The following types of labels are usedthroughout this manual:

Note: A note defines an operating procedure,practice, condition, etc., which is essential toproper operation of the vehicle.

DANGER

A danger label directs the operator’sattention to unsafe practices which couldresult in serious personal injury or death.The caution label is in white type on ablack background with a black border.

WARNING

A warning label directs the operator’sattention to unsafe practices which couldresult in personal injury or severe damageto the vehicle. The warning label is inblack type on a gray background with ablack border.

CAUTION

A caution label directs the operator’sattention to unsafe practices wherepersonal injury is not likely but propertydamage could occur. The caution label isin black type on a white background witha black border.

Page 7: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

WARNING AND ADVISORY LABELS

Advisory, Danger, Warning and Cautionlabels are placed in various locations ofthe vehicle to alert drivers and servicetechnicians about situations that may leadto personal injury or equipment damage.In the event that a label is damaged ormissing the label must be replaced. Contactyour authorized Volvo dealer for assistanceregarding Warning and Advisory labels, alsosee “Warning Labels” page 89.

Page 8: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

General Information 1

Information for the OwnerIf there are questions on the maintenance andperformance of your vehicle, please discussthem with your Volvo Truck dealer. Yourauthorized dealer is required to have trainedmechanics, special tools and spare parts tofully service your vehicle. If necessary, yourdealer will contact the manufacturer for anyassistance.

In addition to this Operator’s Manual, theremay be additional instruction/operator’smanuals supplied by componentmanufacturers. These manuals areplaced in the Owner’s Package and placedin the cab. Be sure to read all the manualsthoroughly before operating the vehicle.

Various safety labels may be placed aboutcomponents by the component manufacturer.Be sure to read and follow these labels toprevent damage to the vehicle, personalinjury or death.

Information in this manual refers to Volvocomponents and Volvo drivetrain. Thereis also certain information regarding theCummins engine. For detailed informationon the Cummins engine or non-Volvoengines and/or drivetrains contact therespective manufacturer.

Establish a Preventive Maintenance Programwith the help of your local Volvo Truckdealer. A Preventive Maintenance Programmakes it possible to maximize the amount oftime your vehicle is up and running, resultingin longer component life. This makes for asafer vehicle by reducing any mechanicalfailures due to poor maintenance practices.

Various truck warranty coverage plans,contingent on application and weight class,are available. Please contact an authorizedVolvo Truck Dealer for complete details.Replacement warranty certificates for VolvoTrucks are available from authorized Volvodealers.

For trucks placed in service after October,2002 and operating in the USA, Mexico andCanada, Volvo dealers can order copies ofthe Standard Truck Warranty Certificate andthe Premium (Purchased) Truck CoverageCertificate. Warranty Certificate copies andOperator Manuals are available in eitherEnglish, Spanish or French. Contact yourauthorized Volvo Truck dealer for moreinformation.

Note: Federal law requires manufacturers tonotify owners of its products in the event of anon-compliance to a Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standard or if a safety related defectis discovered. If you are not the originalowner of this vehicle, please notify us aboutthe change in ownership at the address belowor through an authorized Volvo Truck dealer.This is the only way we will be able tocontact you if necessary.

Volvo Trucks North America, Inc.

Att: Vehicle Registration dept.

P. O. Box 26115

Greensboro, NC 27402–6115

United States of America

Page 9: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

2 General Information

DO NOT Remove this Operator’s manual from the vehicle, it contains important operationaland safety information that is needed by all drivers and owners of this vehicle.

Note: Illustrations in this manual are used for reference only and may differ slightlyfrom the actual vehicle, however, key components addressed in the manual arerepresented as accurately as possible.

This manual covers Volvo VN and VHD series vehicles manufactured by Volvo TrucksNorth America, Inc. with any of the following designations:

• VNL 780

• VNL 670

• VNL 630

• VNL 430

• VNL 300 (Daycab)

• VNM 630

• VNM 430

• VNM 200 (Daycab) Roof fairing choiceis optional.

• VHD 200B (Axle Back)

• VHD 200F (Axle Forward)

L=long hood, M=medium hood

Page 10: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

General Information 3

W8003427

Page 11: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

4 General Information

This manual, and other literature for specific components, for example, VolvoMaintenance and Engine, Cummins engine, Eaton transmission, etc., contain importantinformation which will assist you in safely operating this vehicle. They contain advice andinstructions which will enable you to get the operating economy and performance that youexpect from this quality vehicle.All information, illustrations and specifications contained in this manual are based uponthe latest product information available at the time of publication. If any questions ariseconcerning the current status of Federal or state laws, the appropriate Federal or state agencyshould be contacted.Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or tochange specifications or design without notice and without incurring obligation.

Operating

Before driving this vehicle, locate the instruments and controls, and become thoroughlyfamiliar with their operation. After starting and when driving, always check to makesure the instrument readings are normal.

Note: Certain components on the vehicle are supplied by vendors who meet Volvo Truck’sstringent quality requirements. In addition to major components, these quality requirementsalso apply to parts, which are expected to wear out over time and will need replacement.Examples are filters, tires, brakes, wiper blades, belts etc.When replacing these components select parts that are equal to, or exceed the quality of theoriginal equipment components. After the worn parts are replaced, there may be a differencein the way the vehicle operates or performs. For example, new tires may have differenthandling characteristics than old, worn tires. Be aware of possible changes in the way thevehicle functions and adapt your driving style accordingly.

Page 12: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

General Information 5

General Safety InformationOperating the VehicleEvery vehicle, including heavy duty vehicles,have blind spots. The size of blind spotsvary from driver to driver and from situationto situation. As a skilled, professionaldriver, you are in the best position to avoidaccidents in turns, lane changes or othermaneuvers. Volvo Trucks North America,Inc. provides standard equipment (suchas cabs, windshields, window sizes andmirrors), preferred by most owners anddrivers under most conditions and in mostapplications.

However, due to differences in the sizeof drivers, their seating positions, theuse and operation of their vehicles,personal preferences and other factors, nocombination of mirrors and other visibilityenhancement devices can eliminate all blindspots in every situation.

The safe operation of this vehicle isdetermined by the you, the driver. Becauseof your special preferences, needs andcircumstances, you may choose to add extramirrors and/or other visibility enhancementdevices. If so, contact an authorized VolvoTruck dealer to obtain parts which best fityour personal needs and preferences.

WARNING

All items within the cab must be securedbefore the vehicle is set in motion. Thisincludes, but is not limited to, drinks,clothes, books, televisions, etc. In theevent of a collision, loose items could flyaround inside the cab. This could causepersonal injury.

DANGER

Never try to operate or work on thisvehicle while under the influence ofalcohol. Your reflexes can be affected bythe smallest amount of alcohol. Drinkingand operating this vehicle can lead to anaccident, causing serious personal injuryor death.

Page 13: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

6 General Information

Operating In Bobtail ModeDepending on customer specification,some tractors may be equipped with abobtail air brake proportioning valve whichautomatically redistributes the brakingforce between front and rear axles whennot hooked up to a semitrailer (bobtailoperation).

When operating in bobtail mode, therear brake chambers receive reduced orproportional brake air pressure. When thetractor is towing a trailer, the rear brakechambers will receive full (normal) brakepressure. For tractors with no proportioningvalve, the ABS system automaticallycontrols brake pressure.

Note: When operating bobtail, be certainthat glad hands, trailer air hoses, electricalcable and connectors are properly stowedand secure. Do not allow them to rub orchafe on other components.

Page 14: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

General Information 7

DO NOT OverloadThis vehicle has been designed andassembled for a maximum gross vehicleweight rating (GVWR) and a maximum frontand rear axle weights rating (FAWR andRAWR). The actual rating for this vehiclecan be found on the label attached to the doorframe on the driver’s side. If any of thesethree ratings is exceeded and overloadingoccurs, instability, poor handling, failure ofparts and accelerated wear can occur.

W8003115

DANGER

Under no circumstances should thepublished GVWR, FAWR, and/or RAWRbe exceeded. Failure to observe theseprecautions can lead to the loss of vehiclecontrol, resulting in a vehicle accidentcausing serious personal injury or death.

DANGER

DO NOT exceed the load rating ofthe tires or the vehicle weight ratings.Overloading may result in tire failurecausing loss of vehicle control, leading toan accident resulting in severe personalinjury or death.

Page 15: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

8 General Information

VN Front Bumper / License Plate MountingWhen placing the licence plate on thevehicle, make sure the opening in the bumperis not covered.

Place the license plate below the opening inthe front bumper. Measure from the pointsmarked in the illustration to obtain correctpositioning to place the license plate.

Measuring points:A to A: LateralB to B: VerticalC to C: Center line

CAUTION

DO NOT cover the opening in the frontbumper with a license plate. Coveringthis hole will restrict airflow to the lowerportion of the radiator. This can cause theengine to overheat, which can damagethe engine.

Note: DO NOT mount the license plates inthe unshaded area. Make sure the openingin the bumper is not covered.The license plate will be slightly slantedtoward the rear of the vehicle.

W8003369

1 Install license plate below thisedge.

Page 16: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

General Information 9

Multiple License Plate MountingInstall multiple license plates as shown.

W8003370

1 Install license plates belowthis edge.

VORAD License Plate MountingInstall multiple license plates as shown.

W8003371

1 Install license plates belowthis edge.

Page 17: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

10 General Information

Roof Extender

The Roof Extender increases fuel economy.The Extender is adjustable to five positionswhich are shown in the illustration here andin the graphs on the following page.

The vehicle is delivered with the extender ordeflector “lowered” or down, which is thetransport position, see “A” in illustration.

To set the extender to normal riding position,measure points H and G then select positions1 through 5 in the rod as determined by theadjustment chart.

B: Position for 630 and 670 vehicles.

C: Position for 780 vehicles.

Note: For 630 and 670 vehicle models theframe height must be measured. See “F”in illustration below.

Note: If “F” measures 10 1/2 in (266mm)subtract 5/8in (17mm) from the valuedetermined for “H”.

W8003470

Roof Extender Measurements

H Height from the top of the trailer to thetop of the frame rail.

G Gap or distance from the back of thecab to the trailer.

F Frame rail height.

W8003466

Page 18: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

General Information 11

630/670 Roof Extender Adjustment Chart

W8003472

780 Roof Extender Adjustment Chart

W8003473

Page 19: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

12 General Information

Reporting Safety Defects

USAThe National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) and Volvo TrucksNorth America, Inc. should be informedimmediately if you believe that the vehiclehas a defect that could cause a vehicleaccident, injury or death.

Contact NHTSA by calling the Auto SafetyHotline or by writing to: NHTSA, U. S.Department of Transportation, Washington,DC 20590.

1 (800) 424-9393or

1 (888) 327-4236

CanadaRefer customer complaints to Volvo TrucksCanada, Inc. or to Transport Canada,Defect Investigations and Recalls.

For written complaints: Transport Canada,Defect Investigations and Recalls, 2780Sheffield Road, Ottawa, ON K1B 3V9.

1 (905) 795-15551 (800) 333-0510

(Bottom number within Canada only)

MexicoVolvo Trucks of Mexico, S.A. de C.V.should be informed immediately if youbelieve the vehicle has a defect that couldcause a vehicle accident, injury or death.Contact Volvo Trucks de Mexico by calling011-52-55-50-81-68-50 or by writing to:Volvo Trucks de Mexico, S.A. de C.V., Prol.Paseo de la Reforma 600, 1er. Piso — 121,Col. Santa Fe Peña Blanca, C.P. 01210,México, D.F.

01 (800) 90 94 900(Within Mexico only)

Note: For Roadside assistance informationsee “Service Assistance and Manuals” page374.

Page 20: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

General Information 13

Modifications to VehicleChassis FrameFrame side rails are heat treated. No weldingis permitted because this can result instructural failure. DO NOT drill througheither top or bottom flanges. A warning labelis also attached to the frame for information.

Drilling is permitted in the frame web inaccordance with a specified hole spacingpattern. Consult an authorized Volvo Truckdealer to obtain approved hole spacingdimensions or refer to the Frame Rail andCross Member Service Manual.

Frame rail and cross member nuts and boltsshould be checked periodically and tightenedto the specified torque if necessary.

W7001277

WARNING

DO NOT weld on any part of the frame ordrill holes in the top or bottom flanges.Serious structural damage could occur.

Frame AlterationsUnder no circumstances can the frame becut and an extension piece added to increasethe wheelbase. The only alteration allowedis wheel base shortening, where the onlychange in the frame rail is a new hole patterndrilled for the new location of the rearsuspension.

CAUTION

Use only electric welders due to thecoating on material used to build cabs.Oxygen and Acetyline welding will notbond properly due to coating.

Welding In VehicleDo not weld anywhere in or on the vehiclebefore disconnecting batteries, all electroniccontrol units (ECUs) and instrument cluster.See “Electrical System” page 315. Refer tothe Welding section.DO NOT use oxy/acetylene welding to repaircab panels.

Page 21: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

14 General Information

Exhaust and Noise EmissionsGeneral

USAThe Federal Clean Air Act, Section 203(a) (3), states the following concerning theremoval of air pollution control devicesor modification of a certified engine to anon-certified configuration:

“The following acts and the causing thereofare prohibited:

(3) For any person to remove or renderinoperative any device or element ofdesign installed on or in a motor vehicle ormotor vehicle engine in compliance withregulations under this part prior to its saleand delivery to the ultimate purchaser, or

for any manufacturer or dealer knowinglyto remove or render inoperative any suchdesign after sale and delivery to the ultimatepurchaser.”

Specifically, please note that no personmay make such changes prior to the saleand delivery of the vehicle to the ultimatepurchaser, and, in addition, no manufactureror dealer may take such action after saleand delivery of the vehicle to the ultimatepurchaser. The law provides a penalty of upto $10, 000 for each violation.

CanadaThe same conditions that apply in the USAapply to Canada, with one exception. Afterthe vehicle is sold to a retail customer, thatis, the end user, the jurisdiction controllingthe emission control devices becomes theprovince in which the vehicle is licensed. Nochanges should be made that render any orall of the devices inoperative.

If the owner/operator wishes to makechanges to the emission control devices,check with the provincial authority beforechanges are made.

MexicoThe same conditions that apply in the USAapply to Mexico. Refer to the MexicanFederal Law for Emission Control whichadheres to EPA regulations. No changesshould be made that render any or all of theemissions control devices inoperative.

If the owner/operator wishes to makechanges to the emission control devices,check with the state authority before changesare made.

Page 22: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

General Information 15

California and EPA Emission Control Warranty Statement

YOUR WARRANTY RIGHTS AND OBLIGATIONS

The California Air Resources Board and Volvo Trucks North America , Inc. (VTNA) arepleased to explain the emission control system warranty on your new vehicle. In California,new motor vehicles must be designed, built and equipped to meet the State’s stringentanti-smog standards. Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. must warrant the emission controlsystem on your vehicle for the periods of time listed below provided there has been no abuse,neglect or improper maintenance of your vehicle.Your emission control system may include parts such as fuel injection system, EGR andengine computer. Also included may be hoses, connectors and other emission-relatedassemblies.Where a warrantable condition exists, Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. will repair yourvehicle at no cost to you including diagnosis, parts and labor.

EPA EMISSIONS PERFORMANCE WARRANTY

YOUR WARRANTY RIGHTS AND OBLIGATIONS

The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and Volvo Trucks North America, Inc.(VTNA) are pleased to explain the emissions performance warranty on your vehicle. Incompliance with section 207(b) of the Clean Air Act, VTNA must warrant the emissioncontrol system on your vehicle for the periods of time listed below, provided there has beenno abuse, neglect or improper maintenance of your vehicle.This manual contains maintenance information, including time and/or mileage intervals atwhich such maintenance should be performed.

For instructions on proper maintenance, including time and/or mileage intervals at whichsuch maintenance should be performed, see your Volvo Maintenance and Engine Operator’sManual VN, VHD.

Your emission control system may include parts such as fuel injection system, enginecomputer, and exhaust after treatment devices (as applicable). Also included may be hoses,connectors or other emission-related assemblies.Refer to the Warranty Certificate for complete coverage details.Federal warranty provisions apply to all vehicles sold in all U.S. states and territoriesregardless of whether a state has enacted state warranty provisions that differ from thefederal provisions.Where a warrantable condition exists, VTNA will repair your vehicle at no cost to you(including diagnosis, parts and labor) any emission control device or system which causesa vehicle to fail an EPA-approved emission short test during its useful life, if you havemaintained and operated the vehicle in accordance with the written instructions of VTNA.

If a facility at which the vehicle is initially presented for repair is unable for any reason tohonor the claim, then, unless you waive in writing, the repair facility must forward the claimto VTNA warranty Administration, (336) 393-2000.

Page 23: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

16 General Information

MANUFACTURER’S WARRANTY COVERAGE

This warranty is applicable for a period of five years, 250,000 miles or 6,250 hours ofoperation, whichever first occurs. If an emission-related part of your vehicle is defective, thepart will be repaired or replaced by Volvo Trucks North America, Inc.This is your emission control system DEFECTS WARRANTY.

OWNER’S WARRANTY RESPONSIBILITIES

As the vehicle owner, you are responsible for the performance of the required maintenancelisted in your owner’s manual. Volvo Truck North America, Inc (VTNA) recommendsthat you retain all receipts covering maintenance on your truck, but VTNA cannot denywarranty solely for the lack of receipts or for your failure to ensure the performance of allscheduled maintenance.You are responsible for presenting your vehicle to a VTNA dealer as soon as a problemexists. The warranty repairs should be completed in a reasonable amount of time, not toexceed 30 days. Claim procedures are outlined in the "Volvo Service Operations Manual."As the vehicle owner, you should also be aware that VTNA may deny you warrantycoverage if your vehicle or a part has failed due to abuse, neglect, improper maintenance orunapproved modifications.If you have any questions regarding your warranty rights and responsibilities, you shouldcontact VTNA Warranty Administration, (336) 393-2000. For California vehicles, contactthe California Air Resources Board at 9480 Telstar Avenue, El Monte, CA 91731.

Page 24: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

General Information 17

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM WARRANTY

Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. WARRANTS TO THE ORIGINAL OWNER, ANDEACH SUBSEQUENT OWNER, OF A NEW TRUCK POWERED BY A VOLVO DIESELENGINE THAT THE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM OF YOUR TRUCK:

1 Is designed, built and equipped so as to conform at the time of sale to all regulations ofthe U.S. Environmental Protection Agency and the California Air Resources Boardapplicable at the time of the manufacture;

2 Is free from defects in material and workmanship which will cause the emission controlcomponents not to function as designed for a period of use of 5 years or 250,000 milesor 6,250 hours of engine operation, whichever comes first.

The 5 years/250,000 miles/6,250 hour warranty period shall begin on the date the vehicleis first delivered to the first retail purchaser or if the vehicle is placed in service as ademonstrator company vehicle prior to the sale at retail, on the date the vehicle is the firstplaced in service.The emission control systems of your new VOLVO engines were designed, built and testedusing genuine VOLVO parts, and the engine is certified as being in conformity withFederal and California emission control regulations. Accordingly, it is recommended thatany replacement parts used for maintenance, repair or replacement of emission controlsystems by VOLVO parts.The owner may elect to have maintenance, replacement or repair of the emission controlcomponents and systems performed by any vehicle repair establishment or individual andmay elect to use parts other than VOLVO parts for such maintenance replacement or repairwithout invalidating this warranty; the cost of such services or parts, however, will not becovered under the warranty except in an emergency situation. A part not being available or arepair not being completed within 30 days also constitutes an emergency.Use of replacement parts which are not of equivalent quality may impair the effectiveness ofemission control systems. If other than Volvo parts are used for maintenance, owner shouldobtain assurances that such parts are warranted by their manufacturer to be equivalent togenuine VOLVO parts. However, the use of other than Volvo replacement parts does notinvalidate the warranty on other components, unless such parts cause damage to warrantedparts.Repairs and service covered by the warranty will be performed by an authorized VolvoTrucks North America, Inc. dealer at their place of business with no charge for parts orlabor including diagnosis using VOLVO parts for the emission control system, that requiresreplacement and is covered by the warranty and found defective.

Page 25: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

18 General Information

In case of an emergency, where an authorized Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. dealer isnot available, repairs may be performed at any available service establishment or by theowner, using any equivalent replacement parts and Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. willreimburse the owner for such repairs including diagnosis not to exceed Volvo Trucks NorthAmerica, Inc’s suggested retail price for the warranted parts and the labor rate appropriatefor the geographical area and the tasks performed.Replaced parts and paid invoices must be presented to a Volvo Trucks North America, Inc.dealer for reimbursement.

The emissions control parts covered by this Emission Control System Warranty arelisted under "What Is Covered by the Emissions Warranty." You are responsible forthe performance of all required maintenance on your new VOLVO engine, includingmaintenance or repairs needed due to severe operating conditions. Volvo Trucks NorthAmerica, Inc. will not deny a warranty claim solely because you have no record ofmaintenance. However, Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. may deny a warranty claimif your failure to perform required maintenance resulted in the failure of a warrantedpart. Receipts covering the performance of regular maintenance should be retained in theevent questions arise concerning maintenance. The receipts should be transferred to eachsubsequent owner of the vehicle with the emission warranted engine.

If the warranty claim is denied, VTNA shall provide a written basis for denial within 30days or a shorter time if required by local, state or federal law. Failure to provide writtenbasis for denial within 30 days or shorter time limit required by state, local or federallaw or for reasons not attributable to the vehicle owner or events beyond the control ofVTNA shall result in VTNA being responsible for repairing the vehicle free of charge tothe vehicle owner.

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. wishes to help to assure that the Emission ControlSystem Warranty is properly administered. In the event that you do not receive the warrantyservice to which you believe you are entitled under the Emission Control System Warranty,you should contact Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. Warranty Administration, (336)393-2000. If you need additional assistance or information concerning the Emission ControlSystem Warranty, contact: Volvo Trucks North America, Inc., Warranty Administration,(336) 393-2000.

You can obtain further warranty information or report violations of the terms of EmissionsPerformance Warranty by contacting the Manager, Certification and Compliance Division(6405J), Warranty Claims, Enviromental Protection Agency, Ariel Rios Building, 1200Pennsylvania Ave. N.W., Washington, D.C. 20460.

Page 26: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

General Information 19

WHAT IS NOT COVERED BY THE EMISSION WARRANTY

This warranty does not cover:

1 Malfunctions in any part caused by any of the following: misuse, abuse, improperadjustments unless performed by a Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. dealer,modifications, alterations, tampering, disconnection, improper or inadequatemaintenance, or use of fuels not recommended for the engine as described in theowner’s manual.

2 Damage resulting from accident, acts of nature or other events beyond the control ofVolvo Trucks North America, Inc.

3 The replacement of expendable maintenance items such as filters, hoses, belts, oil,thermostat and coolant made in connection with scheduled maintenance services oncethese parts have been replaced. Any parts replaced under warranty before the firstrequired replacement point are warranted for the remainder of the warranty period.

4 Replacement items which are not genuine Volvo parts or not authorized by VolvoTrucks North America, Inc.

5 Loss of time, inconvenience, loss of use of vehicle engine, or commercial loss.6 Any vehicle on which the odometer or hourmeter has been disconnected or the mileage

(or hours) has been altered so the actual usage cannot be readily be determined.7 Any vehicle registered and normally operated outside the United States.

Page 27: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

20 General Information

WHAT IS COVERED BY THE EMISSION WARRANTY

The following is a list of the items that are considered a part of the Emission Control Systemsand are covered by the Emission Warranty when installed as original equipment by VolvoTrucks North America, Inc. on vehicles which were built to conform to EnvironmentalProtection Agency and California Air Resources Board regulationsIMPORTANT - This may not include expendable maintenance items. Emission related partsrequiring scheduled maintenance are warranted until their first scheduled replacement point.

I. Fuel Injection System

A. Unit Injector

II. Air Induction System

A. Intake Manifold

B. Turbocharger System

C. Charge Air Cooler (Intercooler)

III. Exhaust System

A. Manifold

B. Exhaust After Treatment (catalyst) (if so equipped)

IV. Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System

A. EGR Valve Assemblies (including EGR function control)B. EGR Pulse ReflectorC. EGR Valve SensorD. EGR Cooler with reed valvesE. Exhaust Pressure Govenor

V. Engine Emission Control System

A. Ambient Air Temperature SensorB. Electronic Control Unit (including Barometric Absolute Pressure Sensor)C. Engine Coolant Temperature SensorD. Boost Pressure/Charge Air Temperature SensorE. Camshaft Position SensorF. Speed Sensor, Fly WheelG. EGR Temperature Sensor

Page 28: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

General Information 21

VI. Miscellaneous Items Used in Above Systems

A. Hose, clamps, fittings and tubing

B. Gaskets and seals

C. Wires, harnesses and connectors

THIS EMISSIONS PERFORMANCE WARRANTY STATEMENT IN NO WAYREPLACES, MODIFIES, ALTERS OR SUPERSEDES THE TRUCK WARRANTY

CERTIFICATE, ITS TERMS AND CONDITIONS, AND ITSLIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS.

BE CERTAIN YOU READ AND UNDERSTAND ALL WARRANTIES WHICHACCOMPANIED YOUR VEHICLE.

Note: Warranty coverage is subject tochange without notice. Contact yourauthorized Volvo Truck dealer for the currentwarranty statement.

Page 29: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

22 General Information

Noise EmissionsVolvo Trucks North America, Inc. warrantsto the first person who purchases this vehiclefor purposes other than resale and to eachsubsequent purchaser, that this vehicleas manufactured by Volvo Trucks NorthAmerica, Inc. was designed, built andequipped to conform, at the time it left thecontrol of Volvo Trucks North America, Inc.,with all applicable U.S. EPA Noise ControlRegulations.

This warranty covers this vehicle asdesigned, built and equipped by VolvoTrucks North America, Inc., and is notlimited to any particular part, componentor system of the vehicle manufactured byVolvo Trucks North America, Inc. Defects indesign, assembly or in any part, componentor system of the vehicle as manufactured byVolvo Trucks North America, Inc., which, atthe time it left the control of Volvo TrucksNorth America, Inc. caused noise emissionsto exceed Federal standards, are covered bythis warranty for the life of the vehicle.

Page 30: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

General Information 23

Noise Control System, Operator Inspectionand Maintenance Requirements

DANGER

Before inspecting a vehicle, set theparking brakes, place the transmission inneutral, and block the wheels. Failure todo so can result in unexpected vehiclemovement and can cause serious personalinjury or death.

A Noise Control System Maintenance Logis located in “Noise Control Log” page 30.This log should be used to document allNoise Control System related maintenance,whether the maintenance results from aspecific noise control system inspection, or adeficiency identified during another generalmaintenance event.

If additional log space is needed, furtherentries may be added on a separate sheet ofpaper. Store these additions with the mainlog to preserve a comprehensive record.It is recommended that copies of all noiseemissions related maintenance invoices beretained.

The following Noise Control Systeminspection and maintenance instructionscontain suggested maintenance intervals.These intervals may need adjustment inorder to best accommodate the specificvehicle usage. The following instructionsonly concern Noise Emissions related itemsand do not address or modify any generalvehicle maintenance requirements.

Page 31: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

24 General Information

Tampering with Noise Control SystemFederal law prohibits the following acts orthe causing thereof:

(1) The removal or rendering inoperativeby any person, other than for purposes ofmaintenance, repair, or replacement, of anydevice or element of design incorporatedinto any new vehicle for the purpose of noisecontrol prior to its sale or delivery to theultimate purchaser or while it is in use;

or

(2) the use of the vehicle after such deviceor element of design has been removed orrendered inoperative by any person.

Among the acts that constitute tampering arethe acts listed:

• Noise Shielding and Insulation Devices

• Cooling System

• Exhaust System

• Air Intake/Air Induction System

• Engine Control, EGR and Fuel Systems

Page 32: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

General Information 25

Noise Shielding and Insulation DevicesMake sure sound shielding and insulatingdevices are intact. Inspect componentsfor damage. Primary system componentsrequiring noise related inspection includethe hood, engine compartment insulatingmaterials (including hood insulation,bulkhead insulation, doghouse insulation,etc.) splash shields, cab skirts, fendershields, and body panels. Inspect all relatedfasteners, brackets, and clamps for damageand tightness.

Acts that constitute tampering with the NoiseShielding and Insulations Devices:

Removing or rendering inoperative theengine and/or transmission noise deadeningpanels, shields or insulating materials.

Removing or rendering inoperative thecab-tunnel or hood noise insulating materials.

Removing or rendering inoperative any truckbody mounted sound insulation componentsand/or shields (cab or fender shields, skirts,wheel housing splash shields, etc.).

Page 33: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

26 General Information

Cooling System

WARNING

DO NOT work near the fan with theengine running or the ignition in the ONposition. The engine fan can engage atany time without warning. Anyone nearthe fan when it turns on could be seriouslyinjured.

Visually inspect cooling system componentsfor damage, and/or misalignment.

Primary system components requiring noiserelated inspection include fan blades, fanclutch, fan shroud, fan ring, and recirculationshields. Check fan blades, fan ring, fanshroud, and recirculation shields for anydamage. Verify that fan blades clear the fanring. Inspect all related fasteners, brackets,and clamps for damage and tightness.Confirm operation of temperature modulatedfan clutch.

Acts that constitute tampering with theCooling System:

Removing or rendering inoperative coolingsystem components (such as the temperaturemodulated fan clutch, fan shroud, fan ring,recirculation shields, etc.).

Page 34: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

General Information 27

Exhaust SystemMake sure the exhaust system is intact.Inspect for damage, misalignment and/orleakage. Primary system componentsrequiring noise related inspectioninclude muffler body, exhaust manifold,turbocharger, and all exhaust system (rigidand flexible) piping. Closely check thesystem for exhaust leaks. Special attentionshould be given to all welds, seams, gaskets,support points, clamps, couplings andconnections.

Inspect all exhaust system fasteners,brackets, and clamps for damage andtightness. Check integrity of internal mufflerbaffling by revving the engine throughnormal operating speeds. Excessive rattlingsounds or very loud operation indicates afailure within the muffler.

Acts that constitute tampering with theExhaust System:

Removing or rendering inoperative exhaustsystem components (such as the muffler,pipes, clamps, etc.).

WARNING

Hot engine! Keep yourself clear of allmoving parts or hot engine parts, exhaustgases, and/or fluids. A hot engine,exhaust, and/or fluids can cause burns.

Page 35: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

28 General Information

Air Intake/ Air Induction SystemMake sure the air intake system isintact. Inspect components for damage,misalignment and/or leakage. Primarysystem components requiring noise relatedinspection include the air cleaner housing,air cleaner element, turbocharger, charge aircooler and intake manifold.

Also inspect all ducts, pipes, hoses, tubingand elbows used to interconnect the system.Special attention should be given to allwelds, seams, gaskets, support points,clamps, couplings and connections.

Inspect all intake system fasteners, brackets,and clamps for damage and tightness.

Acts that constitute tampering with the AirIntake/Air Induction System:

Removing or rendering inoperative airintake/induction system components (filter,filter housings, ducts, etc.).

Page 36: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

General Information 29

Engine Control, EGR and Fuel SystemsActs that constitute tampering with theEngine Control, EGR and Fuel Systems:

Removing rendering inoperative, ormodifying the engine control system suchas the ECU, EGR system components orthe fuel system components, in order toallow the engine to operate outside of themanufacturer’s specifications is not allowedand violates both warranty and legislation.

Page 37: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

30 General Information

Noise Control Log

NOISE CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE LOG

DATE MILEAGE MAINTENANCEPERFORMED

MAINTENANCEFACILITY

Page 38: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

General Information 31

Vehicle Data

Identification and LabelsIt is extremely important that the correctvehicle model and serial number are givenwhenever replacement parts or serviceliterature are ordered. Using these numbers,as well as giving the major componentmodel and serial numbers, will prevent delayand errors in obtaining the correct material.Space is given on the rear inside cover ofthis manual for noting the main componentmodel and serial numbers.

The full 17–digit Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) is shown on the VehicleIdentification label located in the dooropening on the driver’s side (see next page).The 8–digit chassis number is embossedinto the bottom flange right hand side of theframe rail and the top flange left hand sideof the frame rail, 42 inches (1065 mm) backfrom the front edge of the frame rail. The useof this number is very helpful when orderingparts for your vehicle.

W0001995

Vehicle OrderThe Vehicle Order is a complete and detailedrecord of all data pertaining to the assemblyof the vehicle. It should be filed in theOwner’s office where it will be readilyavailable for reference. Any changes made tothe vehicle must become a part of the VehicleOrder and must comply with all applicableFederal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

Page 39: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

32 General Information

Certification LabelThree labels are located in the rear insideframe of the driver side door frame. Theselabels should not be removed.

On the top part of the door frame is theCertification label showing the axle and loadratings for the vehicle as it is built. DO NOTexceed these ratings by overloading.

Vehicle Identification LabelThe VIN is shown on the VehicleIdentification label. The VIN includes thevehicle make, model series, weight class,engine model, where the vehicle was builtand the vehicle serial number. This label alsoshows the truck model designation, majorcomponent model and serial number, cabmodel and serial number, cab and chassispaint colors, and color numbers.

Note: To deter tampering with the originalbuild information, the information onthe label will be destroyed if the labelis removed. If for any reason a label isdamaged, contact your authorized VolvoTruck dealer for a replacement.

Noise Emission Control LabelThe Noise Emission Control label is locatedat the bottom of the three labels on therear inside frame of the driver side door. Itis the Owner’s responsibility to maintainthe vehicle so that it conforms to EPAregulations.

Refer to page 24 for a listing of whatconstitutes tampering with the NoiseEmissions Control.

Page 40: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

General Information 33

ComponentsThe Volvo D12D engine serial number islocated on the rear, left side of the cylinderblock.

The serial number can also be found on thecertification label on the valve cover.

W2003921

The axle model and serial number is locatedon the front left side of the forward driveaxle and the front right side of the rear driveaxle. It is also located on the front right sideof the single axle.

W4002560

Page 41: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

34 Vehicle Access

Cab Doors and Door LockThe cab door can be unlocked with the samekey used for the ignition lock. There is also akeyless remote entry available. See “CentralLocking” page 39. Keys can be made to fitonly one vehicle or all the vehicles in a fleetof Volvos.

The key fits in the door lock either way. Insertthe key and turn it 1/4 turn counterclockwiseto unlock or clockwise to lock the door.

Note: The vehicle is delivered with twoidentical keys. If more keys are needed,order them through your authorized VolvoTruck dealer. The keys are laser cut andrequire a special machine for copying,available through the dealer. Record the keycode and keep it in a secure place. A newkey can be made if the keys are lost.

The door locks are mechanically orelectronically operated. The lock is activatedby either the key from the outside or thedoor lock handle from the inside. Withmechanical locks, only one door can belocked/unlocked at a time. With electricallocks, both doors will be locked/unlockedby operating either the key or the inner doorlock handle on either side.

W0002102

Page 42: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Vehicle Access 35

With manual locks, to lock either doorfrom the inside, push the door lock handleforward.The handle will stay in place, indicating thedoor is locked. It can be unlocked withoutopening the door by moving the door lockhandle to the middle position.

No door can be locked while it is still open.The door must be closed for the lock to work.In the event of a power failure the electricallock system reverts back to a mechanicalfunctioning system.

Push the lever back to open the door.Push the lever forward to lock the door.

W8003089

Page 43: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

36 Vehicle Access

Press button 2 to lock both doors or unlockthe passenger door. (Optional)

W8003087

The door has a position lock that enablesthe door to remain open in two differentpositions. An indented bar is holding thedoor at approximately 30 and in the fullyopen position at approximately 85 .

To close the door from the inside, place thehand in the handhold and pull the door in.

DANGER

To lessen the chance of being thrownfrom the vehicle in case of an accident,always lock the door and wear the safetybelt while driving. Failure to do so cancause serious personal injury or death ifinvolved in an accident. W8003116

CAUTION

DO NOT shut the door by pushing on thedoor panel. Hard pushing may distort themetal in the door panel.

To close the door from the outside, place thehand flat against the door lock area and pushthe door shut. W8003114

Page 44: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Vehicle Access 37

Heated Rear View Mirrors (Optional)Press button 1 once to start electric heatingfor 15 minutes. The indicator light inthe button flashes. The heating is on for15 minutes.

Hold button 1 in for longer than 1 second tostart electric heating.The indicator light in the button comes on.The heating remains on until the engine isswitched off.Heater will run at 100% capacity for the first30 minutes, after which it reduces to 75%capacity.

W8003087

Power Rear View Mirrors (Optional)1 Choose the mirror which is to be

adjusted by pressing buttons 3.L for left mirror and R for right mirror.The light in the button comes on.

2 Adjust the mirror using lever 3

The light in the button goes OFF after10 minutes. If new adjustments are to memade after this, the mirror must be selectedagain.

Page 45: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

38 Vehicle Access

Power Windows (Optional)Open Window (Auto-down)1 Depress the down position (2) on the

button for 1 second2 Release the button3 The window opens

The window stops when it is completelyopen, when the down position (2) on thebutton is depressed again or when the upposition (1) on the button is depressed.

Make small adjustments with short pusheson the button.

W8003086

Close WindowDepress the up position (1) on the buttonuntil the window is completely closed.

Page 46: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Vehicle Access 39

Central LockingThe Central locking is operated using a remote control. There is no alarm in this unit. Thecentral locking unit provides a means for the driver to electronically control the vehicle’sdoor locks, for increased personal safety and driver comfort.

Unlock Door using Remote ControlUnlock the driver door

Press UNLOCKThe side indicators flash

To unlock the passenger door

1 Unlock the driver’s door usingUNLOCKThe side indicators flash

2 Press UNLOCK againThe side indicators flash

W8003090

Lock Door using Remote ControlPress LOCKThe side indicators light up

W8003097

Page 47: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

40 Vehicle Access

Unlock using Key1 Unlock

First unlock: Driver door only isunlocked

2 Lock3 Unlock again

2nd unlock: Both driver & passengerdoors are unlocked

W8003091

Page 48: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Vehicle Access 41

Cab Entry and ExitGeneral

DANGER

DO NOT stand on the steps or any otherpart of the vehicle while it is in motion.The steps and the back of cab access deckplates are only for entering/exiting thevehicle and not for riding on. Failure toheed this warning can result in seriouspersonal injury or death.

WARNING

To avoid personal injury due to a slipand/or fall, observe all the guidelinesexplained in this section marked CabEntry and Exit.

WARNING

Wearing shoes with soles that are dirty orwet increases the chance of injury fromslipping and falling. Be careful whenentering the cab with dirty or wet soles.

WARNING

Both the operator and passenger shouldexercise caution when entering or exitingthe cab. Use the steps and grab handles tosafely get in and out of the cab.

DANGER

Steps are designed to be slip resistant andto provide a stable surface for entering orexiting the cab. However, accumulationof ice, dirt, lubricants, etc. on the stepscan make entering or exiting hazardous.Always make sure the steps are free fromslippery substances. Failure to followthis guideline may result in a fall that cancause serious personal injury or death.

Page 49: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

42 Vehicle Access

WARNING

Always check the security of fairing andsteps before use. Ensure that the fairingsare completely closed and the handles arein the locked position.

CAUTION

DO NOT open fairing while cab door isopen, this can result in paint damage onthe fairing.

W8003120

VN

W8003127

Non Sleeper Cab or VHD

Page 50: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Vehicle Access 43

General Entry Guidelines

WARNING

To avoid personal injury due to aslip and/or fall, observe the followingguidelines.

1 Always have three limbs (one foot andtwo hands or two feet and one hand)in contact with the vehicle at all timeswhen entering or exiting the cab or thearea behind the cab.

2 Be certain you have a firm handholdand/or stable foot position beforetransferring weight to that position. Forexample, do not start to put weight ona foot until you are certain your foot isproperly on the step and will not slipwhen you transfer your weight.

3 DO NOT climb on top of the frame, fueltanks or storage boxes to make trailerhook-ups.

4 If the vehicle is equipped with airfairings, do not use the side mountedfairing (wind deflector) brackets andbraces as steps or grab handles.

5 Be certain that the grab handles are clearof snow, mud, ice or other substancesthat could make them slippery beforeusing them. DO NOT use steps or grabhandles if they are slippery or damaged.

6 Be certain that all grab handles, stepsand related parts are in good workingcondition. Any defects should bereported and repaired before using thegrab handles and steps.

7 DO NOT step on the curved surface ofthe fuel tanks. They may be slipperyfrom snow, mud, ice, water, spilled fuelor other slippery substances.

8 If a step is mounted to the top of thebattery box, be certain that the batterybox cover is properly fastened beforestepping.

9 If a vehicle is equipped with removablechassis fairings, be certain the fairingis properly fastened before using steps.For more information on securing thefairings see “Chassis Fairing/StepsOpenand Locked Positions” page 45.

10 DO NOT jump from the cab or from thesteps to the ground.

11 Always face the cab when entering orexiting.

12 DO NOT hold anything in your handswhen entering or exiting the cab or thearea behind the cab. Log books, cups,clipboards, jackets, luggage and the likecan be placed on the cab floor or reardeck plate before entering or exiting.

Page 51: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

44 Vehicle Access

13 Make sure your safety belt isdisconnected before exiting the cab.

14 Make sure the safety belt is fullyretracted and out of the way prior toentering or exiting the cab.

15 DO NOT put your foot on any surfacethat does not have slip resistant, self-cleaning material. If there is no stepmaterial, the surface may be slipperyand you may fall.

16 Before entering or exiting, be certainthat the soles of your shoes/boots arefree from grease, mud or any othersubstance which could make themslippery.

17 Always put the foot flat on the top ofthe step. DO NOT place your foot onthe side or edge of the step.

BE SURE TO FOLLOW ALL OF THESEINSTRUCTIONS BEFORE ENTERINGOR EXITING THE CAB OR THE AREABEHIND THE CAB.

Page 52: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Vehicle Access 45

Chassis Fairing/StepsOpen and Locked PositionsThe chassis fairing on the VN vehicle foldsup and down for battery and air tankaccess. See page 304.

Opening Fairing

To open fairing: Rotate both handles tounlocked position, and pull fairing open.

WARNING

Always check security of fairing andsteps before use. Ensure that the fairingis completely closed and the handles arein the locked position. To prevent injuryfrom slip and fall.

CAUTION

DO NOT open fairing while the cab dooris open, this can result in paint damageon the fairing.

W5001359

Unlocked position

W5001358

Locked position

Page 53: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

46 Vehicle Access

Closing and Locking Fairing

WARNING

Make sure the fairing/steps are lockedinto position. Failure to lock fairing /stepscould result in personal injury due to slipand fall.

To close and lock fairings: Pull handles with fingers to the unlocked position asindicated in illustration, with the first set of arrows (1), while pushing with palmsagainst the fairings, see arrows (2).Once the fairing is closed, make sure both handles are returned to the locked position,see page 45.

Note: Slot 4 must be completely engagedinto bushing 3 before fairing is closed andcan be locked.

W8003105

Page 54: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Vehicle Access 47

Securing the Fairing/StepMake sure the handle is rotated to the lockedposition. Pull on the fairing/step to ensurethe fairing/step is locked into position. Seeillustration.

W8003196

Page 55: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

48 Vehicle Access

Driver Side Entry/ExitOpen the door. Place any hand-carried itemson the cab floor. Grasp the right grab handlewith your right hand and the left grab handlewith your left hand. Put the right foot fullyon the bottom step and pull yourself up tothe opening.

Slide hands up on the handles, if necessary.Put the left foot on the top step and step up.Step into the cab with the right foot first.

To exit, reverse the process. Do not attemptto exit the cab while carrying any items inyour hands.

WARNING

On vehicles without side fairings, alwaysmake sure that the battery box cover issecurely fastened before stepping up.Failure to fasten the cover may lead to afall and personal injury.

W8003112

Passenger Side Entry/ExitOpen the door. Place any hand-carried itemson the cab floor. Grasp the left grab handlewith your left hand and the right grab handlewith your right hand. Put the left foot fullyon the bottom step and pull yourself up tothe opening.

Slide hands up on the handles, if necessary.Put the right foot on the top step and step up.

Step into the cab with the left foot first.

To exit, reverse the process. Do not attemptto exit the cab while carrying any items inyour hands.

W8003117

Page 56: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Vehicle Access 49

Behind the Cab EntryWhen trailer air and electrical connectionscan not be coupled from the ground, FederalRegulations require commercial carriersto provide back-of-cab access steps, grabhandles and plates.

Depending on what option is chosen, grabhandles are available in many variations. Ineach case, make sure to always have threelimbs (one foot and two hands or two feetand one hand) in contact with the vehicle atall times when entering or exiting the areabehind the cab.

WARNING

Be careful when entering the back-of-cabarea with dirty or wet soles. Wearingshoes with soles that are dirty or wetincreases the chance of slipping or falling.

W8003122

Grasp the grab handle to the left with bothhands. Put the left foot onto the bottom stepand pull yourself up. Put the right foot onthe top step and step onto the deck plate withthe left foot.

WARNING

Always perform trailer hook-ups whilestanding on the ground. DO NOT climbon top of fuel tanks or frame rails tohook up or disconnect trailer air lines andelectrical cord. Use only the metal, slipresistant steps provided to prevent a slipand fall injury.

W8001363

Page 57: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

50 Vehicle Access

Stand on the ground when connecting the airand electrical connections to the trailer.

W3005321

Page 58: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Vehicle Access 51

Entering Sleeper from Seat

Standard Gear LeverWhen moving from the driver seat to thesleeper section, follow this procedure:

• Make sure the parking brakes are set.

• Place the gear shift lever in a gearposition toward the rear of the vehicle.

• If equipped with an adjustable steeringcolumn, move the steering wheel upand forward.

• Place the left hand on the steering wheeland the right hand on the top of the gearlever.

• Move the right foot out to the middleof the floor.

• Lift the upper body, supported by thehands on the steering wheel and the gearlever and step out from the seat area.

• Place the left hand on the steeringwheel and the right hand on the top ofthe dash.

• Move the right foot out to the middleof the floor.

• Lift the upper body, supported by thehands on the steering wheel and thedash and the step out from the seat area.

W4001391

Page 59: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

52 Vehicle Access

Luggage Compartment VNTo gain access to the luggage compartments,there is a pull-ring connected to the lock,located at the lower rear corner of the cabdoor opening, on each side (not shown). Pullring to unlock the door. The lock has a safetylatch that will hold the door in place, even ifthe door is not fully locked. To open door,hold pull-ring out while pulling the door out.

W8003124

The door swings out from the bottom onhinges mounted on the top. To assist inopening and to hold the door open, there aretwo compressed gas cylinders mounted oneach door. The door will swing up by itselfwhen pulled out a short distance and thenreleased. Manually switch the luggage lampON. Switch lamp OFF before closing door.

W8003123

Safety equipment and tow hooks are storedin the luggage compartments. If equipped,the sleeper heater and air conditioning unitare located in the passenger side luggagecompartment.

WARNING

Always place heavy objects in the luggagecompartment. Sudden stops or suddenturns could cause personal injury ifheavy objects fall from overhead storageshelves.

Page 60: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Vehicle Access 53

Hood VN, VHDNote: The VN vehicle is used as anexample in this section. This procedureapplies to VN and VHD vehicles.

The hood is locked down by two latches, oneon each side of the back end of the hood

The hood release handle is at the bottomof the steering column. Pull the lever asshown in illustration to open hood. The hoodis raised about two inches off its restingposition and remains there.

Make sure the hood can be opened fullywithout hitting anything. Stand sideways infront of the hood with feet in line with thevehicle. Place feet well apart and grasp therecessed handle in the front part of the hood.Transfer the body weight by leaning awayfrom the hood. Lift the hood until it is pastthe balance point. Release the hood and let itcomplete the opening movement unaided.

Two restraint cylinders will engage duringthe last part of the opening. The cylinderswill slow and dampen the hood down to itsresting position.

W8003185

Hood LatchVNM 200 Day Cab, Short FairingThe VNM Day cab hood is opened byunlocking and releasing both sides of thelatch located underneath the left and righthand side panels. See illustration.

W8003446

Page 61: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

54 Vehicle Access

WARNING

Make sure that no one is in the way ofthe hood when closing. The hood couldinjure a person under the hood.

To close the hood, stand with feet well apart,place hands along the front edge of the hood.Bend the knees and let the leg muscles dothe work when lifting.

Raise the hood up to the halfway point.Carefully guide the hood down with enoughspeed that the hood latches lock the hood inplace when it comes to its normal restingposition.

W8003113

Manual Hood OpeningIn the event of a malfunction in the hoodopening mechanism, the hood latches canbe manually operated through an opening inthe wheel well splash shield. The opening isnormally covered by a plate.

To access the opening, remove the twoscrews using a T30 Torx screwdriver.Remove the cover plate.

The hood latch can now be accessed throughthe hole. Operate the latch manually bypushing the lever in towards the engine. Dothe same on the other side.

Page 62: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Pre-Trip Inspection and Daily Maintenance 55

General

DANGER

Before working on or inspecting avehicle, set the parking brakes, place thetransmission in neutral and block thewheels. Failure to do so can result inunexpected vehicle movement and cancause serious personal injury or death.

Safety is the most important and obviousreason for doing a pre-trip inspection.Federal and state laws require inspectionperformed by the driver. Federal and stateinspectors also inspect commercial vehicles.An unsafe vehicle can be placed “out ofservice” until the driver or owner correctsthe deficiency. Owners and operators shouldfamiliarize themselves with sections 49CFR 396.11 and 396.13 concerning Federalrequirements for vehicle inspection. Certainother laws may also apply.

Section 49 CFR 396.13 states that all motorcarrier drivers must complete a written reportat the end of each work day for each vehicleoperated, covering most of what is coveredin the pre-trip list. The report should listall defects or deficiencies discovered by thedriver. A pre-trip inspection prepares for theend-of-work report.

Starting on the next page are suggestedguidelines to be used in performing truck,tractor and trailer pre-trip inspections.Depending on the application of the

vehicle being used, these guidelines shouldbe modified to include other necessaryinspection points. For example, steps andgrab handles should be checked daily onrefuse trucks because the operator is gettingin and out of the cab more frequently.

If any component or system does not passthis inspection, it must be corrected beforeoperating the vehicle. Whenever equipmentrequires adjustment, replacement, repair orlubrication, refer to the Service Manuals orcontact an authorized Volvo Truck dealer forthe correct procedures, specifications andintervals.

Take your time going through the pre-tripinspection. Remember that a carefulpre-trip inspection saves time by eliminatingunscheduled stops for correcting a faultyitem.

The following information has been providedby the American Trucking Association asdeveloped by the D.O.T. Office of MotorCarriers (BMCS).

Page 63: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

56 Pre-Trip Inspection and Daily Maintenance

Pre-Trip Inspection Quick ListNote: The VN vehicle is used as anexample in this section. This procedureapplies to VN and VHD vehicles.

W0001230

Inspect the vehicle in a circular manner as shown in theillustration. Numbers between parentheses in the list,refer to pages in this manual where component functionand necessary inspection is explained in detail.

Page 64: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Pre-Trip Inspection and Daily Maintenance 57

Approaching the Vehicle

• Check under the vehicle for oil, fuel,coolant leaks or other signs of damage.

• Check body surfaces for signs of breaksor damage.

Preparation

• Open drain cocks on air tanks to let thetanks drain ( page 304).

• Chock wheels on vehicle and, if hookedup, trailer.

• Close air tank drain cocks.

• Start the engine and let the air pressurebuild up to normal ( page 293). Stopengine.

• Switch on parking lights and hazardlights ( page 116).

• Apply parking brakes ( page 298).

• Pull the hood release lever, release thehood latches, ( page 53). Raise hood.

Step 1: Left Side Of the CabLeft Front Wheel

• Check condition of wheel rim.Especially look for cracks, missinglockrings, bent or broken studs, clampsor lugs.

• Check condition of tire: properlyinflated, no serious cuts, bulges, treadwear or any signs of misalignment;valve stem not touching wheel, rim orbrake drum; valve cap in place.

• Check wheel bearing and hub: noobvious leaking on outside or insidewheel. Verify correct oil level in hub.

Left Front Suspension

• Check condition of spring, springhangers, shackles, U-bolts: no cracks,breaks or shifting.

• Check shock absorber condition.

Page 65: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

58 Pre-Trip Inspection and Daily Maintenance

Step 1: Left Side Of the Cab (continued.)Left Front Brake

• Condition of brake drum. With brakesreleased, look for a noticeable gapbetween lining and drum (This checkcannot be made if dust covers are inplace).

• Condition of brake air hose.

• Check brake chamber mounting boltsand bracket.

• Check slack adjuster and chamberpushrod travel.

Condition of Front Axle and Steering System,Left Side

• No loose, worn, bent, damaged ormissing parts.

Under Hood, Left Side

• Check coolant hose condition.

• Check condition of fan drive belts.

• Check engine and surrounding areas forcoolant, oil and fuel leaks.

• Check wiring harnesses for signs ofdamage.

Step 2: Front Of Cab Area

Condition of Windshield

• Check for damage and clean if dirty( page 72 ).

• Check windshield wiper arms forproper spring tension.

• Check wiper blades for any damage,“dead” rubber and securement to arm.

Lights and Reflectors

• Lower hood and inspect parking,clearance and identification lights onhood and cab. They should be clean,operating and of the proper color.

• Reflectors clean and proper color.

• Turn on headlights. High and lowbeams should be operating and lensesclean. If equipped, check daytimerunning lights.

• Left and right front turn signal lightsclean, operating and proper color. Raisehood.

Grille

• Check that charge air cooler andradiator or bugscreens are clean andundamaged.

Step 3: Right Side Of Cab Area

Right Front Wheel

• Check condition of wheel rim.Especially look for cracks, missinglockrings, bent or broken studs, clampsor lugs.

• Check condition of tire: properlyinflated, no serious cuts, bulges, treadwear or any signs of misalignment;valve stem not touching wheel, rim orbrake drum; valve cap in place.

• Check wheel bearing and hub: noobvious leaking on outside or insidewheel. Verify correct oil level in hub.

Page 66: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Pre-Trip Inspection and Daily Maintenance 59

W0001230

Step 3: Right Side Of Cab Area(continued.)

Right Front Suspension

• Check condition of spring, springhangers, shackles, U-bolts: no cracks,breaks or shifting.

• Shock absorber condition.

Right Front Brake

• Condition of brake drum. With brakesreleased, look for a noticeable gapbetween lining and drum (This checkcannot be made if dust covers are inplace).

• Condition of brake air hose: check forany chafing.

• Check brake chamber mounting boltsand bracket.

• Check slack adjuster and chamberpushrod travel. With brakes appliedor released, look for conspicuouslydifferent positions of the slack adjusters.

Condition of Front Axle and Steering System,Right Side

• No loose, worn, bent, damaged ormissing parts.

Under Hood, Right Side

• Check condition of coolant and heaterhoses.

• Check condition of fan drive belts.

• Check engine and surrounding areas forcoolant, oil and fuel leaks.

• Check fuel separator sight glass anddrain if necessary. Check for leaks.

• Check wiring harnesses for signs ofdamage.

• Check air filter with brackets and hosesfor loose connections or damage. Checkfilter gauge, if mounted on the filter.

Step 4: Right Saddle Tank AreaRight Fuel Tank(s)

• Securely mounted and not damaged orleaking.

• Fuel lines secure and not leaking.Check that shut-off valves are open.

• Tank(s) full of fuel. Cap on and secure.

Page 67: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

60 Pre-Trip Inspection and Daily Maintenance

Condition of Visible Components

• Rear of engine: not leaking.

• Transmission: not leaking. If equippedwith oil cooler, check for leaks or thatair-to-air cooler is not blocked.

• Check drive shaft.

• Exhaust system: secure, not leaking,not touching wires, fuel or air tubing.

• Frame and cross members: no bends,cracks or breaks.

• Air tubing and electrical wiring:secured against snagging and chafing.

Step 5: Right Rear Vehicle AreaDual Wheels, One Or Two Axles

• Check condition of wheels and rims.Especially look for cracks, missinglockrings, bent or broken spacers, studs,clamps or lugs.

• Check condition of tires: properlyinflated, no serious cuts, bulges, treadwear or any signs of misalignment;valve stems not touching wheels, rimsor brake drums; valve caps in place andno objects stuck between the wheels.

• Check that both tires are of same type,for example, not mixed radial and biastype and that their circumferences arematched.

• Check wheel bearing and hub: noobvious leaking on outside or insidewheel.

Suspension

• Check condition of springs (leaf or air),spring hangers, shackles and U-bolts.

• Axle alignment.

Brakes

• Condition of brake drums. With brakesreleased, look for a noticeable gapbetween lining and drum (This checkcannot be made if dust covers are inplace).

• Condition of brake hoses: check for anychafing.

• Check brake chamber mounting boltsand brackets.

• Check slack adjusters and chamberpush rod travel. With brakes appliedor released, look for conspicuouslydifferent positions of the slack adjusters.

• Check spring brakes.

Step 6: Rear Of Vehicle AreaFrame Area

• Frame or cross members not bent,cracked or otherwise damaged ormissing.

• Check that air tubing and electricallines are properly secured to the framewith no damage or chafing.

Lights and Reflectors

• Tail lights, brake lights and turn signallights: operating, clean and propercolor.

Page 68: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Pre-Trip Inspection and Daily Maintenance 61

W0001230

Step 7: Coupling System AreaFifth Wheel

• Securely mounted to the frame.

• No missing or damaged parts.

• Check that trunnion and plate areproperly lubricated ( page 347).

Sliding Fifth Wheel

• Mechanism not worn, bent, damaged orparts missing ( page 349).

• Properly lubricated.

• All locking pins present and locked inplace.

• If air operated: no air leaks.

Air Tubing and Electric Lines Visible FromThis Point

• Should be secure from dangling.

• Both air lines and electric line shouldbe free from damage, oil and grease.

Step 8: Left Saddle Tank and Left RearVehicle Wheels AreaDual Wheels, One Or Two Axles

• Check condition of wheels and rims.Especially look for cracks, missing

lockrings, bent or broken spacers, studs,clamps or lugs.

• Check condition of tires: properlyinflated, no serious cuts, bulges, treadwear or any signs of misalignment;valve stems not touching wheels, rimsor brake drums; valve caps in place andno objects stuck between the wheels.

• Check that both tires are of same type,for example, not mixed radial and biastype and that their circumferences arematched.

• Check wheel bearing and hub: noobvious leaking on outside or insidewheel.

Suspension

• Check condition of springs (leaf or air),spring hangers, shackles andU-bolts, no cracks, breaks or shifting.

Brakes

• Condition of brake drums. With brakesreleased, look for a noticeable gapbetween lining and drum (This checkcannot be made if dust covers are inplace).

• Condition of brake hoses: check for anychafing.

Page 69: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

62 Pre-Trip Inspection and Daily Maintenance

• Check brake chamber mounting boltsand brackets.

• Check slack adjusters and chamberpush rod travel. With brakes appliedor released, look for conspicuouslydifferent positions of the slack adjusters.

• Check spring brakes.

Condition of Visible Components

• Transmission: not leaking.

• Drive shaft: looks OK.

• Exhaust system: secure, not leaking,not touching wires, fuel or air tubing.

• Frame and cross members: no bends,cracks or breaks.

• Air tubing and electrical wiring:secured against snagging and chafing.

Left Fuel Tank(s)

• Securely mounted and not damaged orleaking.

• Fuel lines secure and not leaking.Check that shut-off valves are open.

• Tank(s) full of fuel. Cap on and secure.

Battery Area

• Open the battery box ( page 318).Battery box securely mounted tovehicle.

• Batteries secured against movement( page 318).

• Battery cases not broken or leaking.Battery cables free from damage.

• Tops of batteries and terminals cleanand free from foreign material.

• If equipped, replace battery lid andmake sure it is securely fastened( page 318).

Page 70: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Pre-Trip Inspection and Daily Maintenance 63

W0001230

In the Cab

• Check steps and grab handles forlooseness or breakage ( page 43). Also,clean them if there is any substance thatmakes them slippery, which makes cabentry/exit hazardous.

• Start the engine. If equipped, checkthat exhaust rain cap opens whenaccelerating engine.

• Check gauges and telltale light function,see the “Instruments and Controls”section ( page 120 to page 142).

• Check function of low air warning( page 128). Check the DriverInformation Display (DID) for any faultcodes ( page 144 to page 187).

• Check clutch function ( page 290).If equipped, check for clutch brakefunction.

• Check windshield wipers and washers( page 71) and horns, including back-upalarm, if equipped.

• Clean inside windshield, door windowsand instruments. Clean mirrors.

• Check temperature control and defroster( page 191). If equipped, check mirrorheater.

• Check condition of warning triangles,fire extinguisher and flares ( page 93).

• Adjust the seat ( page 219. Checkmirror adjustment.

• Check safety belts for function anddamage ( page 79).

• Apply service brakes. After initial drop,pressure should hold steady, or increaseslightly, with engine at idle.

• Check steering wheel for excessive freeplay.

• Check for loose items in the cab. Securethem if necessary.

Page 71: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

64 Pre-Trip Inspection and Daily Maintenance

Hooking Up To TrailerHook-up Preparation

• Check kingpin and mounting plateon trailer, free from wear, bends ordamage.

• Chock trailer wheels.

Fifth Wheel Or Trailer Hitch

• No visible space between fifth wheeland trailer ( page 355).

• Locking jaws around the shank and notthe head of kingpin ( page 355).

• Release lever properly seated and safetylatch/lock engaged ( page 356).

• Check all connections to dolly or trailerhitch and safety chains are secured.

• Check function of trailer air supplyvalve and trailer brakes.

Sliding Fifth Wheel

• Check that fifth wheel is not so farforward that the tractor frame will strikethe landing gear during turns.

Page 72: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Pre-Trip Inspection and Daily Maintenance 65

W0001361

Note: Refer to the trailer manufacturer’smanual for specific information on the trailerchecks.

Step 9: Trailer Front AreaAir and Electrical Connections

• Glad hands properly mounted, freefrom damage and not leaking.

• Trailer cord receptacle properlymounted, free of damage; plug properlyseated and safety catch engaged toprevent accidental disconnect.

• Air and electrical lines properly securedagainst tangling, snagging and chafingwith sufficient slack for turns.

Step 10: Right Side of Trailer AreaLanding Gear or Dolly Area

• Fully raised; no missing or damagedparts.

• Crank handle present and secured.

• If power operated, no air/hydraulicleaks.

Spare Wheel(s)

• Carrier or rack not damaged.

• Spare wheel securely mounted in rack.

• Tire and wheel condition adequate for aspare: proper size, properly inflated.

Lights and Reflectors

• Trailer side clearance lights: clean,operating and proper color.

• Reflectors clean and proper color.

Frame and Body

• Frame and crossmembers not bent,cracked, damaged or missing.

• Proper placarding.

• Body parts not damaged or missing.

Page 73: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

66 Pre-Trip Inspection and Daily Maintenance

Step 11: Right Rear Trailer WheelDual Wheels, One Or Two Axles

• Check condition of wheels and rims.Especially look for cracks, missinglockrings, bent or broken spacers, studs,clamps or lugs.

• Check condition of tires: properlyinflated, no serious cuts, bulges, treadwear or any signs of misalignment;valve stems not touching wheels, rimsor brake drums; valve caps in place andno objects stuck between the wheels.

• Check that both tires are of same type,for example, not mixed radial and biastype and that their circumferences arematched.

• Check wheel bearing and hub: noobvious leaking on outside or insidewheel.

Suspension

• Condition of springs (leaf or air), springhangers, shackles and U-bolts.

• Axle alignment.

• Condition of torque rod arms.

• If equipped with sliding axles, checkposition and alignment. Look fordamaged, worn or missing parts, alllocks present, fully in place and locked.

• Flexible air tubing not cracked, cut,crimped or otherwise damaged. Securedagainst tangling, dragging and chafing.

Brakes

• Condition of brake drums. With brakesreleased, look for a noticeable gap

between lining and drum (This checkcannot be made if dust covers are inplace).

• Condition of brake hoses: check for anychafing.

• Check brake chamber mounting boltsand brackets.

• Check slack adjusters and chamberpush rod travel. With brakes appliedor released, look for conspicuouslydifferent positions of the slack adjusters.

• Check spring brakes.

Step 12: Rear of Trailer AreaLights and Reflectors

• Rear clearance, identification and taillights clean, operating and proper color.

• Reflectors clean and proper color.

Cargo Securement

• Cargo properly blocked, braced, tied,chained, etc.

• Tailboard up and properly secured.End gates free from damage, properlysecured in stake pockets.

• Canvas or tarp (if required) properlylatched down to prevent water damage,tearing, billowing or blockage of eithermirrors or tail lights.

• Rear doors securely closed, latched orlocked; required security seals in place.

• Underside guard in place: not cracked,bent or broken.

Page 74: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Pre-Trip Inspection and Daily Maintenance 67

W0001361

Note: Refer to the trailer manufacturer’smanual for specific information on the trailerchecks.

Step 13: Left Rear Trailer Wheels AreaDual Wheels, One Or Two Axles

• Check condition of wheels and rims.Especially look for cracks, lockringsmissing, bent or broken spacers, studs,clamps or lugs.

• Check condition of tires: properlyinflated, no serious cuts, bulges, treadwear or any signs of misalignment;valve stems not touching wheels, rimsor brake drums; valve caps in place andno objects stuck between the wheels.

• Check that both tires are of same type,for example, not mixed radial and biastype and that their circumferences arematched.

• Check wheel bearing and hub: noobvious leaking on outside or insidewheel.

Suspension

• Condition of springs (leaf or air), springhangers, shackles and U-bolts.

• Axle alignment.

• Condition of torque rod arms.

• If equipped with sliding axles, checkposition and alignment. Look fordamaged, worn or missing parts, alllocks present, fully in place and locked.

• Flexible air tubing not cracked, cut,crimped or otherwise damaged. Itshould be secured against tangling,dragging and chafing.

Brakes

• Condition of brake drums. With brakesreleased, look for a noticeable gapbetween lining and drum (This checkcan not be made if dust covers are inplace).

• Condition of brake hoses: check for anychafing.

• Check brake chamber mounting boltsand brackets.

• Check slack adjusters and chamberpush rod travel. With brakes appliedor released, look for conspicuouslydifferent positions of the slack adjusters.

• Check spring brakes.

Page 75: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

68 Pre-Trip Inspection and Daily Maintenance

Step 14: Left Side of Trailer AreaLanding Gear or Dolly Area

• Fully raised; no missing or damagedparts.

• Crank handle present and secured.

• If power operated, no air/hydraulicleaks.

Spare Wheel(s)

• Spare wheel securely mounted in rackwith no damage to rack.

• Tire and wheel condition adequate for aspare: proper size, properly inflated.

Lights and Reflectors

• Trailer side clearance lights: clean,operating and proper color.

• Reflectors clean and proper color.

Frame and Body

• Frame and crossmembers not bent,cracked, damaged or missing.

• Proper placarding.

• Body parts not damaged or missing.

Before Leaving the Parking Area

• Remove chocks from the wheels.

• Test trailer hook-up by slowly pullingwhile applying the trailer brakes withthe trailer brake hand control valve.

• Test the service brakes before leavingthe parking area.

• Test parking brakes by stopping on a20% grade and applying the parkingbrakes. The parking brakes shall holdthe combined vehicle and trailer withoutmoving.

Page 76: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Pre-Trip Inspection and Daily Maintenance 69

Daily MaintenanceThe following should be checked daily inaddition to performing the pre-trip inspectionof the truck or tractor and trailer.

While checking the fluid levels, visuallyinspect hoses, pipes and their connectionsfor signs of leakage. Inspect the groundunder engine, transmission and rear axle(s)for signs of leakage.

DANGER

Before working on or inspecting avehicle, set the parking brakes, place thetransmission in neutral and block thewheels. Failure to do so can result inunexpected vehicle movement and cancause serious personal injury or death.

Check coolant level in the coolant tank. Thelevel should be above the minimum markshown on the side of the tank.

WARNING

DO NOT remove the cap to the surge tankwhile the engine and radiator are still hotand under pressure. Scalding fluid and/orsteam may be blown out under pressure ifthe cap is taken off too soon.

If the coolant level is low, add more coolantto the tank so the level is above the minimummark. Coolant should be filled through thecap in the middle of the tank.

CAUTION

Add only pre-mixed coolant made up of50% clean water and 50% antifreeze. Seethe “Operator’s Manual, Maintenance &Engine” for more detailed information.

CAUTION

Engines equipped with automatic startsystems can start automatically. Alarmsounds before automatic start. Failure toturn off ignition before working on fan orbelts can result in personal injury.

W2003913

1 Minimum2 Maximum

Page 77: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

70 Pre-Trip Inspection and Daily Maintenance

WARNING

Keep yourself clear of all moving or hotengine parts. A hot engine can causeserious burns.

Check oil level in the engine with thedipstick. The oil level should be betweenthe minimum and maximum marks on thedipstick. DO NOT overfill!

See the “Operator’s Manual, Maintenanceand Engine” for correct types of oil used inVolvo engines. W0002105

To add oil to the engine, remove oil cap onthe valve cover and fill through the hole.

Note: In the VHD vehicle there is also aright-side oil fill.

CAUTION

Make sure the oil added is the same typeof oil that is in the engine. The wrongtype of oil could accelerate wear onengine if not suited for application.

Check fluid level in the clutch fluid reservoir.Fluid level should be between the levelmarks on the reservoir.

If fluid needs to be added, use brake fluid,DOT 4.

W4002567

Page 78: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Pre-Trip Inspection and Daily Maintenance 71

Check level in the windshield washerreservoir. If washer fluid needs to be added,use a commercially reputable washer fluidthat has good cleaning capability and doesnot freeze in cold weather.

Windshield Washer Capacity

Model Reserve Total Capacity

VN 1.5 gallons(6.35 liters)

3.26 gallons(13.70 liters)

VHD 0.9 gallons(3.875 liters)

2.06 gallons(8.675 liters)

W3005289

VN: An indicator will appear in the DriverInformation Display (DID) screen whenthere is approximately 1.5 gallons (6.35liters) remaining in the reservoir.VHD: An indicator will appear in theDID screen when there is approximately0.9 gallons (3.875 liters) remaining in thereservoir.

Check that the windshield wipers and washerare working properly.

The windshield washer spray should coverthe windshield well. The wipers shouldclean the windshield in a couple of strokesand should not leave any streaks.

Note: Make sure that all fluid levels are attheir proper levels. If the fluids are not attheir proper levels, add as necessary. Referto the “Operator’s Manual, Maintenanceand Engine” for information on what typesof fluids are recommended for your Volvovehicle.

W3004393

Page 79: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

72 Pre-Trip Inspection and Daily Maintenance

If the windshield needs an overall cleaning,use a long handled cleaning sponge andsqueegee.

Clean the side windows in the same waywith a long handled sponge and squeegee.

Note: The VNM headlight is used asan example in the illustration. Thisprocedure applies to VN and VHDvehicles.

Check all lights for proper function:

• Headlights

• Daytime running lights

• Parking and marker lights

• Stoplights

• Turn signals

W3005266

WARNING

When draining the air tanks, DO NOTlook into the area of the draining air.Dirt or sludge particles may be in the airstream that could cause eye injury.

Empty out the air tanks daily. Charge the airsystem fully and with the engine shut off,listen for air leaks.

W8003103

Page 80: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Additional Safety Features 73

Safety BeltsGeneral

DANGER

Safety belts must be properly worn at alltimes by the driver and all passengerswhile the vehicle is in motion even if thevehicle is equipped with a SupplementalRestraint System (SRS or air bag). Failureto do so can result in serious personalinjury or death in the event of a collision.

DANGER

Fasten the safety belt before starting todrive. Trying to fasten the safety beltwhile the vehicle is moving may leadto an accident, causing serious personalinjury or death.

Safety belt assemblies installed in thisvehicle meet FMVSS 209, “Type 1”and “Type 2” requirements. They arerecommended for all persons weighing over50 lb. (25 kg).

T8009149

A child restraint system should also beprovided for each child weighing 50 lb. (25kg) or less. It should meet the requirementsof FMVSS 213, “Child Restraint System.”Carefully read and follow all manufacturer’sinstructions on installation and use. Becertain the child remains in the restraintsystem at all times while the vehicle is inmotion. W8002741

Page 81: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

74 Additional Safety Features

Safety belts must be worn by the driver andall passengers at all times. Before adjustingor fastening the safety belt, move the seatforward or backward and adjust the seatheight as necessary. Sit erect and adjust theseat cushion and seat back for a comfortabledriving position. In the event of a collision,a correct driving position maximizes theeffectiveness of the safety belt.

There are both Federal and State lawsgoverning the use of safety belts. As lawsdiffer from state to state, make yourselffamiliar with the current rules.

W8002741

Tether straps are installed on allsuspension-type seats. Tether strapshelp secure the seat to the floor and areintended to restrain the seat and safety beltin case of an accident or sudden stop.

The tethers are not adjustable and do notneed any adjustment.

Page 82: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Additional Safety Features 75

Operating the Safety BeltTo fasten the safety belt, pull the belt outfrom the retractor and insert the latch intothe buckle. Verify proper lock of the latch bypulling on the latch.

Adjust the slack by pulling on the top partof the belt until the lower part, or the partthat crosses the lap, is adjusted to fit “snug.”Release the top part and let the retractor pullthe belt in.

The lap portion of the safety belt should beworn low across the pelvic region (hip bone)and adjusted snugly. Never adjust the lapbelt across the abdomen. A push button onthe buckle is used to release the safety beltlatch by pushing in the button release on thebuckle.

W8001835

The buckle portion of the safety belt systemis different depending on the seat optionchosen. The National Standard and Comfortseat has a separate buckle that is attachedto a floor anchor by a seat strap. This seatstrap is not adjustable, and does not need tobe adjusted.

The buckle for the Volvo seat is bolted to theseat frame.

W8001836

Page 83: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

76 Additional Safety Features

Sleeper Safety Restraint for VN

DANGER

Always use the safety restraint when thevehicle is in motion. Failure to do so notonly may cause severe injuries or death tothe passenger in the event of an accident,but also poses a danger of injuries to otheroccupants of the vehicle.

DANGER

Anytime the vehicle is in motion, apassenger using the sleeper bunk shouldbe strapped in using the safety restraint.The top bunk should always be used withthe harness in place, whether the vehicleis in motion or not. Falling from the upperbunk can result in severe personal injuryor death.

The restraint netting can be used for securingloose articles. Any loose articles that canshift in the cab during hard cornering orbraking should be kept restrained.

W8003171

Fasten the restraint by connecting the bucklewith the latch. Make sure the belts are nottwisted. Test the latch connection by pullingon the belt. If they come apart, reconnectand test again. If the connection can not bemade, replace the belt before using the bunkfor sleeping during driving.

To loosen the restraint, press the red releasebutton on the latch (1). Restraints shouldbe properly stored when not used. Havingthe restraint laying loose in the cab can be asource for unintentional snagging.

W8002475

Page 84: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Additional Safety Features 77

Safety Restraint VN 430, VN 630 and VN 670The restraint has latches in one end andbuckles in the other so it can only be installedone way. Connect the restraint to the backwall and the buckles on the floor. Connectthe side tethers and adjust the straps to forma “tent” over the bunk (VN 670 upper bunkdoes not have the “tenting” feature).

W8003206

W8003169

Upper Bunk

W8003170

Lower Bunk

Page 85: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

78 Additional Safety Features

Safety Restraint VN 780Connect the restraint to the back wall first.The wall connectors are located in thestorage units. Connect the lower part of therestraint to the lower buckles. Connect theside tethers and adjust the straps to form a“tent” over the bunk.

Note: The restraints for top and bottombunks are different. Each belt can only beinstalled to the correct bunk.

W8003217

Lower Bunk

W8003172

Upper Bunk

Page 86: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Additional Safety Features 79

Inspection

DANGER

Failure to properly inspect and maintainthe safety belts can cause serious personalinjury or death.

DANGER

It is critical that any time a vehicle hasbeen involved in an accident, the entiresafety belt system must be replaced in thevehicle (which also includes the sleeperbunk restraints) if they were in use at thetime of the accident. Failure to replace thesafety belt system may result in seriousinjury or death.

DANGER

A damaged safety belt, whether visiblydamaged or not, could result in seriouspersonal injury or death in the event of anaccident. The safety belt systems shouldbe replaced at least every five years.

DANGER

DO NOT bleach or re-dye the colorwebbing because it may cause a severeloss of belt strength. This loss of strengthcould allow the safety belt to break understress, thus resulting in severe personalinjury or death.

Check the belts, buckles, latch plates,retractors, anchorages, and guide loopsto ensure that they are working properly.Look for loose/damaged parts (withoutdisassembling) that could keep the restraintsystem from working properly. If the safetybelt, retractor and hardware were in useduring a collision, they must be replaced.The restraint system anchorage fastenersmust be replaced if necessary. If thereis any doubt about the restraint system’seffectiveness, replace the entire safety beltassembly.

Page 87: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

80 Additional Safety Features

The following maintenance guidelines detailhow to inspect safety belts and tethers forcuts, fraying, extreme or unusual wear ofthe webbing, etc., and damage to the buckle,retractor, hardware or other factors whichindicate that safety belt system replacementis necessary.

Check the web wear at the buckle/latch area.The webbing must be closely examined todetermine if there are any cuts, fraying orextreme wear in the webbing. Cuts, frayingor excessive wear would indicate the needfor replacement of the safety belt system.

W8001406

The D-loop web guide is an area wherealmost constant movement of the safetybelt webbing occurs because of the relativemovement between the seat and the cab. Thisconstant movement forms an area wherewear will often occur. The webbing mustbe closely examined to determine if thereare any cuts, fraying or extreme wear in thewebbing. Cuts, fraying or excessive wearwould indicate the need for replacement ofthe safety belt system.

W8002478

Page 88: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Additional Safety Features 81

Check to make sure that the D-loop webguide is rotating properly. If the guide is notrotating properly, the webbing will pull at thewrong angle through the guide, acceleratingwear.

W8002477

If equipped, check the comfort clip forcracks or possible damage. Make sure that itworks properly.

Check the buckle by inserting the latch andverifying proper operation. Determine ifthe latch plate is worn or deformed. Checkthe buckle and latch casing for cracks orbreakage.

W8001404

Page 89: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

82 Additional Safety Features

The retractor web storage device is mountedon the B-pillar, just behind the door in thecab. The retractor is the heart of the safetybelt system and can be damaged if abused,even unintentionally. Check the retractorweb storage device operation to ensure thatit is not locked and that it spools out andretracts the webbing properly.

W8002481

If tethers are being used to anchor the safetybelts to the floor, make sure that they areproperly attached to the seat. Tethers mustalso be inspected for web wear and propertightness of mounting hardware.

W8001387

National Standard Seat

Page 90: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Additional Safety Features 83

All hardware for safety belt mounting pointsshould be evaluated for corrosion. Allattachment points of the system should bechecked for tightness of mounting hardware.

Check the web in areas exposed toultra-violet rays from the sun or extreme dustor dirt. If the original color of the web inthese areas is extremely faded, the physicalstrength of this web may have deteriorated.If this condition exists, replace the safetybelt system.

T8009149

IsringHausen Standard Seat

Page 91: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

84 Additional Safety Features

Important Facts About Safety Belts in Heavy TrucksThe high mileage associated with heavytrucks, the continual relative movement ofthe seat with the cab, the possible contactwith the vehicle seat or other parts of thecab structure, and the potential exposureof this safety belt to severe environmentalconditions make it crucial to inspect the seatbelt system regularly. It is recommendedthat the system is inspected every 15,000miles (24,000 km) or more often if the

vehicle is exposed to severe environmentalor vocational conditions. Any safety beltsystem that shows cuts, fraying, extremeor unusual wear, significant discolorationsdue to ultra-violet ray exposure, dusty-dirtyconditions, abrasion to the safety beltwebbing or damage to the buckle, latch plate,retractor, hardware or any other obviousproblem should be replaced immediately,regardless of the mileage.

Once replacement of the safety belt hasbeen determined necessary, be certain thatit is replaced only with a Volvo originalreplacement safety belt. See your authorizedVolvo Truck dealer for replacement. YourVolvo safety belt system has been developedand tested specifically for heavy trucks.Replace it only with the exact same designthat the vehicle was equipped with.

If the inspection indicates that any otherpart of the safety belt system requiresreplacement, the entire belt system must be

replaced. An installation guide is attachedto every replacement system, entitled“Three-Point Safety Belt Installation Guide.”There are separate safety belt instructionguides for suspension and stationary seats.Use the proper guide for your type of seatand follow the instructions very closely. Itis vitally important that all components aremounted back in the same positions as theoriginal components that were removed.This will maintain the design integrity of themounting points for the safety belt assembly.

Page 92: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Additional Safety Features 85

Comfort Clip OperationWhen provided, the comfort clip is locatedon the shoulder strap just below the D-ring.

When adjusting the comfort clip, thefollowing procedure must be followed forproper adjustment:

1 Pull out only enough webbing to allowslight pressure to the shoulder andchest. Allow no more than a 1 in.(25 mm) slack when measured betweenthe chest and the belt.

2 To activate the clip mechanism feature,lift the lever up to clamp the webbingin place.

Note: When the safety belt is not in use, theclip should be in the open position to allowthe seat belt to retract to its proper position.Also make sure that the adjustment of thecomfort clip does not interfere with theoperation of the safety belt.

W8002388

Open position

Always adjust the clip so that there is amaximum of 1 in. (25 mm) of slack betweenthe belt and chest (about two fingers width).If a larger slack is allowed, the effectivenessof the safety belt is decreased in the eventof a collision.

W8001837

Page 93: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

86 Additional Safety Features

SRS AirbagThe SRS airbag is intended to supplement —not replace — the standard safety belt. Theairbag is not deployed when the truck is hitfrom behind, from the side or if it rolls over.For best protection, sit in a normal, uprightposition. Always wear the safety belt.

For added safety, the vehicle maybe equipped with an airbag or SRS(Supplemental Restraint System) as asupplement to the standard three-pointanchored safety belt. The SRS is designed toreduce the risk of injury to the driver’s faceand upper part of the body. Together withthe safety belt, the airbag helps prevent thedriver from being thrown against the steeringwheel, windshield or other hard surfaces inthe cab.

The Volvo SRS Airbag provides increasedprotection in frontal collisions, where thevehicle collides with a fixed or heavy objectwith enough force to activate the sensorswhich then activates the airbag. Damageto the vehicle is not always proportional towhether the SRS Airbag deploys or not.

The SRS Airbag is not designed to beactivated with:

• Collision from the sides• Collision from the rear• Rolling over• Head-on collisions at low speed or

against soft objects such as bushes,snow drifts, etc.

Page 94: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Additional Safety Features 87

SRS SystemThe inflatable airbag is folded into the centerof the steering wheel. It inflates in the eventof a serious collision above a certain level,where the angle of impact, crash severity,speed and nature of the object involved inthe collision all play a part in whether or notthe airbag is activated.

W8003129

The system consists of a gas generatorsurrounded by the inflatable airbag. In theevent of a sufficiently violent collision,a control unit activates the gas generatorignitor and the airbag inflates. To cushion theimpact, the airbag deflates when compressed.This also releases some non-toxic smoke intothe cab. The entire sequence, from inflationto deflation of the airbag, takes a few tenthsof a second.

WARNING

Never attempt to drive with a deployedairbag. With the bag hanging out of thehub of the steering wheel, the truck maybe more difficult to steer. In addition,other safety systems may be damaged.Continuous exposure to the smoke anddust created during the deployment of theairbag can cause irritation to the skin andeyes.

Page 95: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

88 Additional Safety Features

The SRS system is continually monitored bythe control unit. A control unit is mountedon a bracket above the engine cover whichdetects deceleration. The control unit alsocontains a standby power unit which cansupply the system with power for a shorttime, incase the normal supply breaks.

If the control unit detects a sufficientlyviolent deceleration (collision), the system isactivated. The gas generator triggers and fillsthe bag with a non-toxic gas within a fewhundredths of a second. During a collision,after the bag is full, gas flows out throughtwo holes in the weave. These holes are largeenough to let the airbag collapse slowly,gently catching the driver.

W8003119

In the event of a problem in the SRS system,an icon is shown in the graphic display in theinstrument cluster.

If a problem develops in the system, theSTOP telltale will come on together with theSRS telltale.

CAUTION

The vehicle should be taken toan authorized Volvo Truck dealerimmediately if the SRS iconcomes onor remains on while the vehicle is beingdriven.

W3005171

T3008842

Page 96: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Additional Safety Features 89

Warning LabelsThe label attached to the left hand sunvisorshows the year and month when anauthorized Volvo Truck dealer should becontacted for a specific inspection and for apossible replacement of the airbag. This isdone to guarantee the function of the airbagafter the indicated date. Replace the labelwhen replacing the airbag module. Neverattempt to make any adjustments to SRScomponents yourself.

T8006843

Steering shafts and steering wheel shouldnot be removed, adjusted or replaced withoutfollowing the proper work procedure. Failureto do so can damage the SRS system, whichcan result in malfunction of the SRS. Awarning label is located on the upper steeringshaft.

T8006842

There is also a label on the inside of thewindshield that indicates the inclusion of anairbag to the vehicle safety features.

T8006841

When equipped with an airbag, a label withthe correct procedure for protecting smallchildren and protecting the driver is attachedto the left hand, overhead storage lid or backof sunvisor.

W8002741

Page 97: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

90 Additional Safety Features

Any queries concerning the SRS systemshould be directed to an authorized VolvoTruck dealer. There is no maintenancerequired for the SRS system until the dateon the warning label located on the left handsunvisor.

WARNING

Never attempt to repair any part of theSRS system. Any interference with thesystem may cause it to malfunction andresult in serious injury or death.

Work on the system may only be carried outby an authorized Volvo Truck dealer.

To allow the SRS system to work asdesigned:

• Never drive an SRS system equippedvehicle with the hands on the steeringwheel pad/airbag module.

• No objects, accessory equipment orstickers may be placed on, attached toor installed near the SRS cover in thecenter of the steering wheel.

Page 98: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Additional Safety Features 91

General Information

When is the Airbag Deployed?The airbag is only deployed during ahead-on collision, where the vehicle hits afixed or heavy object with sufficient force.The SRS system registers both the force ofthe collision and the internal forces causedby the collision. The control unit determinesif the collision is sufficiently violent for theairbag to be deployed.

Note: The SRS system is only activated oncein a collision. If the airbag has deployed, thefollowing is recommended:

• Have the vehicle towed to an authorizedVolvo Truck dealer. Even if the vehiclecan be driven after a collision, it is notrecommended to drive the truck withthe airbag deployed.

• Have an authorized Volvo Truck dealerchange the components in the SRSsystem.

• Only use original Volvo parts whenreplacing the SRS system components(airbag, safety belt, etc.).

When is the Airbag not Deployed?Not all frontal collisions activate the SRSsystem. In a collision with a soft object (asnow drift or bush for example, or a hard orfixed object at low speed), there is no needfor the SRS system to be activated. Theairbag is usually not inflated in response toside-on collisions, impacts from the rear or ifthe vehicle overturns. The extent of damageto the vehicle is no measure of how well theSRS system works.

Page 99: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

92 Additional Safety Features

Can the Airbag be DeployedAccidentally?The complete SRS system is constructedso that the airbag only inflates in particularcollision conditions. The SRS system hasits own diagnostic unit which continuouslymonitors the functioning of the system.

Heart of the Volvo Safety SystemThe three-point anchored safety belt isthe heart of the Volvo safety system. Thebelt should be worn at all times. The SRSsystem is intended as a supplement to thethree-point anchored safety belt.

Page 100: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Additional Safety Features 93

Safety EquipmentSafety triangles and fire extinguishers areavailable as optional equipment. The fireextinguisher should be located by the base ofthe driver seat, between the seat and the door.

W1000176

Warning Triangles, Day Cab & VHDThe warning triangles are stored in a box thatis strapped behind the passenger seat.

W1000177

Sleeper CabThe warning triangles are stored in abox, which is inside the exterior luggagecompartment.

W8003123

Page 101: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

94 Additional Safety Features

VORAD Collision Warning SystemThe Eaton VORAD computerized CollisionWarning System constantly monitorsvehicles ahead with a front end mountedradar and in a blind spot area with an optionalside mounted radar. The Collision WarningSystem warns the driver of potentiallydangerous situations by activating visual andaudible alerts.

DANGER

The Eaton VORAD Collision WarningSystem is intended solely as an aid foran alert and conscientious professionaldriver. It is not to be used or reliedupon to operate the vehicle. Use thissystem together with rear view mirrorsand other instrumentation to maintainsafe operation of the vehicle. Operate aVORAD equipped vehicle in the samesafe manner as if VORAD was notinstalled.The Eaton VORAD Collision WarningSystem is not a substitute for safe drivingprocedures nor will it compensate for anydriver impairment, such as drugs, alcoholor fatigue.The Eaton VORAD Collision WarningSystem may provide little or no warningfor some hazards like: alerts forpedestrians, animals, oncoming vehiclesand cross traffic. SmartCruise will notreact to stationary objects and it does nothave the capability to stop the vehicle.Failure to follow these instructions maylead to a vehicle accident resulting insevere personal injury or death.

If your vehicle is equipped with the EatonVORAD Collision Warning System, readthe manufacturer’s Driver Reference Manualbefore taking the vehicle on the road.

Page 102: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Instruments and Controls 95

OperatingBefore driving this vehicle, locate theinstruments and controls, and becomethoroughly familiar with their operation.After starting and when driving, ensurethat the instrument readings are normal.

Note: Availability of gauges dependson the options the driver selects. Allgauges and telltales may not be used in allvehicles.

Note: The VN and VHD dash layout is thesame, however, the switches and certainswitch positions are different.

Page 103: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

96 Instruments and ControlsD

ash

Ove

rvie

wV

N

W30

0511

5

Page 104: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Instruments and Controls 97

1A

irV

ents

2D

iagn

ostic

Con

nect

or3

Bac

kof

Cab

Lig

ht4

Opt

iona

lSw

itch

(Ope

n)5

Pow

erTa

ke-o

ff(P

TO

)6

Ove

rhea

dB

unk

Lig

ht7

Opt

iona

lSw

itch

(Ope

n)8

Opt

iona

lSw

itch

(Ope

n)9

Fuel

Pres

sure

(VE

D12

only

)10

Smok

eD

etec

tor

11Sl

eepe

rFa

nSp

eed

12O

ptio

nalS

witc

h(O

pen)

13T

raile

rA

irSu

pply

14T

ract

orPa

rkin

gB

rake

15Te

mpe

ratu

reK

nob

16Fa

nSp

eed

17A

CO

N/O

FF18

Air

Dis

trib

utio

n19

Rec

ircu

latio

n20

Rad

io21

Cig

arL

ight

er22

Ash

tray

23A

uxili

ary

12V

Pow

erO

utle

t24

Tem

pera

ture

Sens

or25

Opt

iona

lSw

itch

(Ope

n)26

Opt

iona

lSw

itch

(Ope

n)27

Eng

ine

Bra

ke28

Eng

ine

Bra

keM

ode

Sele

ct29

Opt

iona

lSw

itch

(Ope

n)30

Mar

ker

Inte

rrup

t31

Opt

iona

lSw

itch

(Ope

n)32

Tra

ctio

nC

ontr

ol33

Susp

ensi

onD

ump

345t

hW

heel

Slid

e35

Inte

rwhe

elD

iffe

rent

ialL

ock

36In

tera

xle

Dif

fere

ntia

lLoc

k37

Opt

iona

lSw

itch

(Ope

n)38

Opt

iona

lSw

itch

(Ope

n)39

Aux

#140

Aux

#241

Aux

#342

Tra

iler

Han

dB

rake

Con

trol

43In

stru

men

tClu

ster

44L

ight

Con

trol

Pane

l

Page 105: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

98 Instruments and ControlsD

ash

Ove

rvie

wV

HD

W30

0511

6

Page 106: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Instruments and Controls 99

1A

irV

ents

2D

iagn

ostic

Con

nect

or3

Bac

kof

Cab

Lig

ht4

Opt

iona

lSw

itch

(Ope

n)5

Pow

erTa

ke-o

ff(P

TO

)6

Pow

erTa

ke-o

ff(P

TO

)7

Pow

erTa

ke-o

ff(P

TO

)8

Opt

iona

lSw

itch

(Ope

n)9

Fuel

Pres

sure

(VE

D12

only

)10

Bea

con

Lam

ps11

Snow

Plow

Lam

ps12

Opt

iona

lSw

itch

(Ope

n)13

Tra

iler

Air

Supp

ly14

Tra

ctor

Park

ing

Bra

ke15

Tem

pera

ture

Kno

b16

Fan

Spee

d17

AC

On/

OFF

18A

irD

istr

ibut

ion

19R

ecir

cula

tion

20R

adio

21C

igar

Lig

hter

22A

shtr

ay23

Aux

iliar

y12

VPo

wer

Out

let

24Te

mpe

ratu

reSe

nsor

25O

ptio

nalS

witc

h(O

pen)

26O

ptio

nalS

witc

h(O

pen)

27E

ngin

eB

rake

28E

ngin

eB

rake

Mod

eSe

lect

29T

rans

mis

sion

Ret

arde

r30

Mar

ker

Inte

rrup

t31

Opt

iona

lSw

itch

(Ope

n)32

Tra

ctio

nC

ontr

ol33

Susp

ensi

onD

ump

345t

hW

heel

Slid

e/E

ngin

eA

irC

ontr

ol35

Inte

rwhe

elD

iffe

rent

ialL

ock

36In

tera

xle

Dif

fere

ntia

lLoc

k37

Lif

tAxl

e#1

38L

iftA

xle

#239

Aux

#140

Aux

#241

Aux

#3/L

ift

Axl

e#3

42T

raile

rH

and

Bra

keC

ontr

ol43

Inst

rum

entC

lust

er44

Lig

htC

ontr

olPa

nel

Page 107: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

100 Instruments and Controls

Dash SwitchesNote: Switch positions differ on the VNand VHD dash.

The following switches are found on thepages listed below:

• Smoke Detector: page 250.• Auxiliary Lift Axle: page 341.• Inverter Switch: page 330.

Back of Cab Light (Optional)To activate the back of cab light, press thebottom part of the switch. The light willstay on until the switch is turned to the OFFposition.

Back of cab lights are available as aflush-mounted light in the middle of the cabrear wall or as a high-mounted light on theside of the cab. W3001355

Sleeper Overhead lightingThis operates the overhead lighting in the VNsleeper cabs. It is situated on the left-handside of the dash to allow access to the switchwithout entering the sleeper section of thecab.

The switch works together with the switchon the sleeper control panel [see “SleeperControl Panel (Sleeper Models Only)” page209].

Press the bottom of the switch to turn ON,press the top of the switch to turn OFF.

W3001351

Page 108: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Instruments and Controls 101

Power Take-Off (PTO)There are two basic types of PTOs available:engine-mounted and transmission-mounted.

The transmission mounted PTO is clutchdependent, which means that operation canbe regulated by depressing or releasing theclutch pedal. This PTO should NOT be inuse while driving.

The engine mounted PTO is direct-mountedto the engine and is engaged with a bypassvalve operated by the switch. This PTO canbe in use while driving.

CAUTION

It is important to only engage the switchwhen the PTO is required. Leaving thePTO pump engaged when not neededcan lead to poor performance and pumpdamage.

Transmission-Mounted PTOVN, VHD

The vehicle should be stopped beforeengaging PTO. Engage the PTO bydepressing the clutch pedal and pressing inthe bottom part of the switch. Release theclutch pedal to start the PTO.

One or two PTOs can be run at the sametime. Applications change depending oncustomer needs and components.

Page 109: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

102 Instruments and Controls

Engine-Mounted PTOVN, VHD

The engine should be running at low idle andthe vehicle should be stopped or runningat very low speed before engaging powertake-off. Engage the PTO by depressing thelocking tab and at the same time, depressingthe main part of the switch. The PTO isnow in operation and hydraulic flow can beregulated by the engine speed.

Front Engine-Mounted PTOVHD

The switch legend shown denotes a frontengine (crankshaft) driven PTO. This PTO isclutch independent and may be used whilethe vehicle is in motion. W3005505

Side Engine-Mounted PTOVN, VHD

The switch configuration shown (sideengine -shown here, is used with VolvoSide Engine PTOs. The side engine PTO isclutch independent and may be used whilethe vehicle is in motion. The dash switchis wired to the VECU as a PTO “request”,and the VECU itself operates the PTO pumpwhen conditions permit. While the PTO isactually engaged, a PTO Icon will appear inthe instrument cluster.

W3005506

Page 110: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Instruments and Controls 103

Side Engine-Mounted PTOTwinFlow VHD

The 3-switch configuration (side enginetwinflow) is used on "TwinFlow" PTOapplications. With this system, the 1stswitch (ENABLE) notifies the VECU thatPTO operation is requested. The other twoswitches (A and B) operate the two separateflow control solenoids. This allows selectingbetween different flow rates while the enginespeed remains constant.

While the PTO is engaged, a PTO iconappears in the instrument cluster.

W3005375

Page 111: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

104 Instruments and Controls

PTO Speed AdjustmentEngage the PTO before adjusting the speed.For the PTO speed adjustment to function,the Cruise Control or idle adjust can notbe active, brake and clutch pedals must bereleased, and vehicle speed must be underapproximately 5 mph (8 km/h).

To set engine speed:

1 Set the PTO/CC switch in the ONposition.

2 Depending on configuration, the enginespeed may automatically be selectedwhen the PTO dash switch is activated(Volvo engines only).

3 If NOT, then(a) Volvo engines: Press the RESUMEbutton to achieve the preset PTO enginespeed. Alternatively, the acceleratorpedal can be used to achieve the desiredengine speed, and press SET + or SET-to hold that speed.(b) Cummins engines: Press eitherthe RESUME, SET +, or the RESUMEand SET + buttons simultaneously toachieve one of three possible presetspeeds.

Page 112: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Instruments and Controls 105

To increase/decrease engine speed:

1 Volvo engines: Press and releasethe SET + or SET- toggle switch toincrease/decrease speed in increments(increment size depends on programmedvalue).

2 Cummins engines: Press and holdthe SET + or SET- toggle switch toincrease/decrease speed. When theswitch is released, the engine speed setsat current speed.

To deactivate PTO speed function:

1 Set the PTO/CC switch to the OFFposition.or

2 Depress the service brake pedal.or

3 Depress the clutch pedal(Programmable).or

4 Increase vehicle speed above PTOworking range (typically 5 mph [8km/h]).

W3002499

Page 113: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

106 Instruments and Controls

Exhaust/Engine Brake

DANGER

When operating your tractor bobtail(without a trailer) or on slippery roads,the engine brake switch must be in theOFF position. Failure to follow theseinstructions can result in loss of vehiclecontrol, serious personal injury or death.

DANGER

A vehicle speed retarding device (such as“Volvo Engine Brake (VEB), Intebrake,”“C-Brake,” “Exhaust Brake,” etc.) is notintended to replace the service brakesystem on your vehicle nor intended tobring your vehicle to a stop. A vehiclespeed retarding device is only intendedto retard the speed of your vehicle undercertain conditions.Using the retarding device as a brakecould result in loss of vehicle control andpersonal injury or death.

Note: It is normal for a slight delay to occurin the application of a vehicle speed retardingdevice. When using a device of this type, besure to think ahead and analyze conditions inorder to use the device properly.

Page 114: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Instruments and Controls 107

Several types of engine brakes can beinstalled or are standard on certain engines.All are used to reduce wear on the vehiclebrake linings.

Exhaust Brake, Volvo EngineVN, VHD

The exhaust brake is standard equipment onthe Volvo engine. It provides braking effectto the rear wheels by trapping the exhaust inthe engine. The switch for exhaust brake hastwo positions: ON/OFF.

The exhaust brake is most effective at highengine speed (1,500 to 2,300 rpm). Forproper operation, see page 310.

W3005433

Engine Brake, Volvo Engine — OptionalVN, VHD

The Volvo Engine Brake (VEB) is acompression brake. It works together withthe exhaust brake to provide two levelsof braking power. The switch has threepositions: OFF, LOW and HIGH. With theswitch in position LOW, only the exhaustbrake is engaged. With the switch inposition HIGH, both the exhaust brake andcompression brake are activated. For properoperation, see page 311.

Page 115: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

108 Instruments and Controls

Cummins ISX Intebrake

Standard: Two dash switches control the3-level engine brake; the left dash switchcontrols ON/OFF, the right dash switchcontrols LOW/MED/HIGH.

Optional: A 6-level retarder stalk switchmounted to the right of the steering column.An ON/OFF switch at the end of the stalklever enables/disables the engine brake.

W3005433

Page 116: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Instruments and Controls 109

Fuel PressureThe fuel priming switch is located on theright-hand side of the steering column, inthe dash. This is a non-locking switch, usedto pressurize and bleed the D12D engine.For detailed information about bleeding theengine, refer to the Maintenance and EngineOperator’s Manual.

W3005378

Marker InterruptThis switch interrupts power to the markerlights when held down. When released, itsprings back to the ON position and returnspower to the marker lights.

W3001352

Fan SpeedThe sleeper fan switch located in the dash,controls the sleeper fan speed. The switchin the sleeper control module performs thesame function as the dash switch.

Press the top part of the switch to increase thefan speed, press the lower part to decreasefan speed.

W3005382

Page 117: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

110 Instruments and Controls

Traction Control (TCS)If the vehicle is equipped with a TractionControl System (TCS), the switch can beused to disable the traction control feature,and therefore increase wheel spin. Thismay be useful for decreasing the chances ofgetting bogged down when driving in heavysnow, slush or muddy conditions. See page308 for more information.

W3001336

Snow Plow, VHD(Optional)See “Dash Overview VHD” page 98 forlocation of Snow Plow switch.

Vehicles specified with this option have thefollowing:

• Turn ON low beam Snow Plowheadlamps.

• Turn OFF main headlamps low , highbeam, fog and driving lights.

• In driving mode, DRL remains ON.• Snow Plow direction indicators are

available.

W3005429

Beacon Light, VHD(Optional)See “Dash Overview VHD” page 98 forlocation of Beacon Light switch.

W3005428

Page 118: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Instruments and Controls 111

Steering Column SwitchesWindshield Wiper/WasherThe wiper/washer functions are operated bythe same switch. The wipers have normaland fast speeds which are activated bymoving the lever down one or two positions.To let the wipers engage for a few passes,lightly depress the lever until the wipers startand hold it there. The wipers return to theparking position when the lever is released.

The interval wiper function is engagedby moving the lever up. The normalprogrammed speed is one pass every 10seconds. To shorten the interval time, movethe lever to normal wipe position and thento the interval position again when the nextwiper pass is desired. This way, the intervalcan be programmed between 1 to 10 secondsbetween each pass.

W3005264

To operate the windshield washer, pull thelever toward the steering wheel. If washerfluid needs to be added, use a commerciallyreputable washer fluid that has good cleaningcapability and does not freeze in coldweather.

An indicator will appear in the DID whenthe washer fluid level is low. See page 71for washer level capacity. A 10 secondactivation delay allows for fluid slosh.

Note: In the VNM 200 Day Cab (Shortfairing) the washer fluid indicator is NOTdisplayed in the instrument cluster

T3008838

Page 119: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

112 Instruments and Controls

Steering Wheel ControlsLeft-hand controls:

• Headlamp Interrupt (Top)• Marker Interrupt (Bottom)

When either switch is pressed, thecorresponding lights toggle from theircurrent state. If OFF they change to ON andif ON they change to OFF. When pressedfor more than 3 seconds, the lights revertautomatically to the initial state.

W3005294

Right-hand controls:

• Radio controls

Press +, up or –, down to change the radiovolume.

Press the switch left or right to change radiostations. The radio will seek the next stationwith a strong signal.

If a CD is playing, press the switch left orright to change songs.

W3005304

Page 120: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Instruments and Controls 113

Pneumatic SwitchesDifferential Locks (Optional)There are differential locks available for eachdriving axle or between axles.

The inter-wheel differential lock eliminatesone-wheel spin-out on slippery surfaces andimproves traction.

The inter-axle differential lock eliminatesslipping between axles to improve traction.

Each switch has a safety latch to preventaccidental engagement. When the lock isengaged, a telltale lights up in the instrumentcluster.

A differential lock should only be used ona slippery surface, NOT when driving ongood road conditions. If a differential locktelltale is activated in the instrument cluster,do not make turns until the telltale has goneout. See page 338 for information on how toproperly engage and drive with differentiallocks engaged.

W3001991

Left: Inter-wheel diff. lockRight: Inter-axle diff. lock

W3000904

Engine Air Control, VHDThe engine fresh air control switch controlsair flow to the engine air cleaner. In thenormal OFF position, air is pulled throughthe side hood vent, and into the air cleaner.In the ON position, air is pulled from withinthe engine compartment into the air cleaner.This feature is useful for keeping out coldair or snow for example, when using a snowplow.

W3005380

Page 121: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

114 Instruments and Controls

Suspension Dump, VN

CAUTION

The vehicle must never be driven withthe air springs deflated. Damage to airsuspension parts will occur if springs arenot inflated properly.

Tractors with rear air suspension have acontrol for deflating the air springs. Use thiswhen uncoupling from trailers. See page 357for correct operation when uncoupling.

The switch has a safety latch to preventaccidental engagement. Depress the latchand press in the bottom part of the switchto deflate the air springs. A telltale in theinstrument cluster will light up when theswitch is in the “on” position.

This switch controls a chassis mountedelectric over air solenoid valve. Whenthe switch is in the "Suspension Dump"active position (or rocked down to the "ON"position), if the ignition switch is turned tothe OFF position the solenoid valve will nolonger have power and the suspension willre-inflate. This switch only performs thisfunction when the ignition switch is in the"ON" position."

W3001341

Page 122: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Instruments and Controls 115

Sliding Fifth Wheel

DANGER

The release must never be operated whilethe vehicle is operating on the road. Fifthwheel position adjustment must only bedone when stationary. Damage to thefifth wheel, trailer kingpin and slidermay occur if not operated properly andmay lead to an accident, causing seriouspersonal injury or death.

The sliding fifth wheel uses an airoperated release mechanism and is used fordistributing loads more favorably betweenthe front and rear axles to comply withvarying state and provincial laws. See page349 for correct operation.

Depress the latch and press in the bottompart of the switch to release the slider locks. W3001346

Page 123: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

116 Instruments and Controls

Driving Light ControlsLight Control PanelExterior lighting is controlled through thelight control panel. The rotary knob controlsthe parking lights, headlights, fog or drivinglights. See illustration below.

1 Off2 Parking Lights3 Headlights4 Dimmer Control Dash Lighting5 Hazard Lights

W3005376

Standard

1 Off2 Parking lights3 Headlights4 Fog or Driving Lights5 Hazard Lights6 Dimmer Control (Dash) Lighting

W3005377

Optional

Page 124: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Instruments and Controls 117

Driving and Fog Lights, VNM & VNLFog and driving lights are wired so they areturned on only when the headlight control ison. Fog lights are used with the low beamheadlights. Driving lights are used with thehigh beam headlights. Switching from lowto high beam will automatically switch fromfog lights to driving lights.

Driving and fog lights should be usedwhen driving conditions require additionallighting. The driving or fog lights shouldNOT be used in traffic where they mightdistract other drivers thereby creating asafety hazard.

W3005410

VNM

W3005274

VNL

Page 125: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

118 Instruments and Controls

Miscellaneous SwitchesHorn SwitchesElectric and air horns are standardequipment. They are both operated from thesteering wheel. If the vehicle is equippedwith an airbag, (SRS), the airbag module canbe pressed down anywhere around the edgeto engage the air horn.

W6001503

1 Air horn2 Electric horn (city horn)

Cigar LighterTo operate the cigar lighter, press the centerin until it stays in. The heating element willheat up and pop the lighter out when it isready for use. The ash tray is located next tothe cigar lighter.

The cigar lighter socket is optimized for usewith the cigar lighter heating element. Thissocket cannot be used as an auxiliary 12 Vpower supply.

CAUTION

DO NOT connect a device with a currentrating in excess of the amount labeled.

W3005271

Page 126: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Instruments and Controls 119

Optional SwitchesAuxiliary SwitchesGeneric switches are available for auxiliaryfunctions that are installed by the customer.These switches can be purchased from yourauthorized Volvo Truck dealer.

W3005502

Page 127: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

120 Instruments and Controls

Instrument Cluster Overview

High Level Cluster

1 Tachometer

2 Upper Telltales

3 Speedometer

4 Front Brake Air Pressure

5 Rear Brake Air Pressure

6 Oil Pressure

7 Coolant Temperature

8 Lower Left & Right Telltales

9 Driver Information Display (DID)

10 Fuel Level

11 Intake Manifold Pressure

12 Application Air Pressure

13 Exhaust Pyrometer

Page 128: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Instruments and Controls 121

Mid Level Cluster

1 Tachometer

2 Upper Telltales

3 Speedometer

4 Front Brake Air Pressure

5 Rear Brake Air Pressure

6 Oil Pressure

7 Coolant Temperature

8 Lower Left & Right Telltales

9 Driver Information Display (DID)

10 Fuel Level

Page 129: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

122 Instruments and Controls

Basic Level Cluster

1 Tachometer

2 Upper Telltales

3 Speedometer

4 Front Brake Air Pressure

5 Rear Brake Air Pressure

6 Fuel Level

7 Voltmeter

8 Coolant Temperature

9 Oil Pressure

10 Telltales

11 Odometer Display

Page 130: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Instruments and Controls 123

GaugesTachometerThe tachometer is divided into three fieldswith the aid of LEDs: Green LEDs, redLEDs and between these, a dark field withextinguished LEDs.

Use the green field for normal driving.

Use the dark field when the engine brake isbeing used.

Never allow the engine to go into the redfield.

SpeedometerThe speedometer is driven by the vehicle’selectronic system.

Intake Manifold Pressure Gauge(High Level Cluster Only)The gauge indicates intake manifold pressureto the engine. The pressure generated by theintake manifold pressure should be the sameat a given engine temperature, speed, andload. Intake manifold pressure will vary fordifferent engines and vehicle models. Bymonitoring the gauge, the operator can avoidengine problems.

Page 131: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

124 Instruments and Controls

Oil Pressure GaugeThe red LED light in the lower left corner ofthe gauge comes on when the oil pressureis too low. The pressure limit is dependenton the engine manufacturer’s electronicprogram. When the gauge light comes on,the red STOP telltale illuminates, the buzzersounds, and the oil pressure symbol appearson the driver information display screen(DID). For example, if the engine is at risk,the engine controller may react by deratingthe engine power. Bring the vehicle to a safestop where the problem can be checked.

Note: The engine will shut down within30 seconds from when the light comeson. Pull off the road as soon as possiblewithout creating a safety hazard.

DANGER

Failure to take necessary action when theSTOP telltale is on can ultimately resultin automatic engine shutdown and lossof power steering assist. Vehicle crashcan occur, resulting in personal injury ordeath.

Page 132: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Instruments and Controls 125

Coolant Temperature GaugeThe gauge indicates engine coolanttemperature. Normal operating temperaturereading is between 170 to 215 F(80 to 105 C) for the VOLVO engine.Under normal driving conditions, thetemperature must be below the red sector.

The temperature range for the coolant willvary depending on the type of engine, load,grade, ambient air temperature and operatingconditions. If the temperature remains belowor exceeds the normal temperature range,the cooling system should be checked forproblems by your Volvo Truck dealer.

The LED light in the lower right corner of thegauge comes on when coolant temperatureis excessive. The temperature limit isdependent on the electronic program for theengine model.

Together with the gauge light, the red STOPtelltale will come on and the buzzer willsound. The engine is at risk and the engineECU may react by derating the engine power.Stop at the first safe place where the problemcan be checked.

Note: If the coolant temperature returns tonormal shortly after exceeding the limit andno repair is performed, the warning messagesgo out but a fault message will be logged.

Page 133: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

126 Instruments and Controls

Fuel Level GaugeThe gauge is connected to a fuel sensor unitin the fuel tank. There is only one sensoreven if the vehicle is equipped with dualtanks.

When the check light comes on, there is7–10% fuel left in the tank.

Application Air Pressure Gauge(High Level Cluster Only)Air gauges are connected to the air brakesystem via sensors. They will indicate thebrake application pressure from either thefront, rear or trailer circuit pressure.

The gauge will not register air pressure untilthe foot brake pedal is depressed or thetrailer hand brake is applied.

Page 134: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Instruments and Controls 127

Pyrometer Gauge (High Level Cluster Only)The Pyrometer gauge indicates the exhausttemperature, which helps the operator get thebest efficiency from the engine.

Variations in engine load can cause theexhaust temperature to vary. For examplehigh exhaust gas temperature is the result ofprolonged engine lugging or overfueling.

If the Pyrometer reading shows exhausttemperature exceeds normal, reduce fuelto the engine until exhaust temperature isreduced. Shift to a lower gear if the engine isoverloaded.

Voltmeter Gauge(Basic Level Cluster Only)The Voltmeter gauge shows the batteryvoltage.

Page 135: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

128 Instruments and Controls

Front and Rear Brake System Air Pressure GaugesThe system air gauges are connected tothe front and rear circuit tanks via sensorsmounted on the pass-through wall.

The two gauges should register equal airpressure. Gauge 1 shows the air pressure inthe front brake circuit; gauge 2 shows the airpressure in the rear brake circuit.

By observing the gauge pointers, the operatorcan detect a pressure drop if an air leakdevelops and can readily identify the circuitaffected.

If the pressure in a brake circuit air tankdrops below approximately 65 psi (420 kPa),the red indicator in the lower left cornerof the gauge will come on and the STOPtelltale warning indicator comes on. Inaddition, the buzzer simultaneously comeson, if the vehicle starts to move at speedhigher than 1 mph.

If the air pressure is allowed to drop below65 psi (420 kPa) in both systems, the“mechanical” brakes will automaticallyengage to stop the vehicle.

Note: The STOP telltale warning + solidred LED light + buzzer are simultaneouslypresent when the engine is ON and thevehicle is in motion. There is no buzzer ifthe vehicle is idle/stationary. If the vehicleis idle, only the STOP telltale warning +solid red LED light appear.

DANGER

Failure to observe these precautions canresult in the loss of braking performance.This can lead to vehicle accident, whichcan result in personal injury or death.

Gauge 1

Gauge 2

Page 136: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Instruments and Controls 129

Secondary GaugeThe Secondary Gauge is an optional feature,which is available only with the Mid andHigh instrument clusters. The instrumentcluster receives temperature informationfrom the datalink then passes the informationto the Secondary gauge for viewing.

W3006104

1 Secondary gauge

W3006081

Engine/Transmission TemperatureGauge

W3006082

Front/Rear Axle TemperatureGauge

Page 137: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

130 Instruments and Controls

Display SymbolsAlarm, Check and Information Symbols

Symbol Meaning

Coolant temperature

Coolant level

Engine oil pressure

Engine Oil level

Engine oil temperature

High engine oiltemperature

Fault in preheating

Engine temperature toolow for engine brake(VEB)

Air filter restriction

Engine idle shut down

Transmission oiltemperature

High transmission oiltemperature

Transmissionmalfunction

Symbol Meaning

Low brake pressure orABS

Air dump

Air suspension pressure

Air suspension pressurewarning

Wheel spin

Anti-spin temporarilydisengaged

5th wheel locked

Stop

Voltage meter

Voltage warning

SRS

Low level washer fluid

Fault in main beam

Page 138: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Instruments and Controls 131

Symbol Meaning

Interaxle lock

Differential lock

Fault in brake light

Fault in blinkers

Caution, freezingconditions

Fuel level

Outside temperature

Air application

Parking Brake engaged

Axle Temperature

Engine speed

Intake manifoldpressure

Symbol Meaning

Instantaneous/averagefuel economy(liters/100km)

Instantaneous/averagefuel economy (km/liter)

Instantaneous/averagefuel economy (mpg)

Instantaneous/averagefuel economy(liters/hour)

Leg fuel (liter)

Leg fuel (gallon)

Trip data (km)

Trip data (miles)

Average speed (km/h)

Average speed (mph)

Estimated time of arrival

Estimated time of arrival

Safety Belts

Page 139: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

132 Instruments and Controls

Status SymbolsStatus symbols are displayed at the bottomlevel of the DID screen.

Symbol Meaning

Preheating active orpreheating fault

Parking heater timeractivated

Alarm clock activated

Message active

MI Odometer, miles

KM Odometer, kilometers

PTO Power take-off active

CC Cruise Control active

Engine brake position 1

Symbol Meaning

Engine brake position 2

Engine brake position 6

Axle suspensionpressure, front

Axle suspensionpressure, rear

Distance to empty

ABS malfunction trailer

ABS malfunction tractor

Other SymbolsThere are various other symbols for the othermenus which are not explained here. Referto the sections on the different menus forexplanations of those symbols.

Page 140: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Instruments and Controls 133

Messages, GeneralThere are three types of messages:

• Stop• Warning• Information

Stop, warning, and information messages aredisplayed automatically with their associatedsymbols. Above the display are three lamps(for stop warning, or information messages)used to draw the attention of the driverwhenever necessary. If the engine is runningwhen a stop message comes on, a buzzer isalso activated.

More than one message can be active at thesame time. A displayed message can bereplaced by a new message provided thenew message has a higher priority. ie: Thedisplayed message is the highest priority.

Page 141: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

134 Instruments and Controls

Stop MessageIn the event of a serious fault, the red STOPlight comes on; the buzzer will also activateif the engine is on. An illuminated STOPmessage light signifies a serious problem hasbeen detected, and the driver must respondimmediately to the problem.

In some cases preventive action may be takenby the engine ECU to protect the engine.

Example 1: if oil pressure or coolant leveldrops too low, the engine is forced to lowidle and when the vehicle speed is zero, theengine shuts down.

Example 2: with excessive coolanttemperature, the engine will gradually reducepower output to 50%. This telltale alwaysactivates the buzzer.

The engine may be restarted after the keyis turned off and then back on. However, itwill only operate for 30 seconds unless theproblem is resolved.

W3005171

DANGER

Failure to stop and take necessary actionwhen the STOP message light is on canresult in automatic engine shutdown andloss of power steering assist. This canresult in vehicle accident, personal injuryor death.

This lamp ON means the vehicle must besafely pulled off the road and stopped. Insome instances, the engine must be switchedoff immediately.

The engine could be forced to low idle within30 seconds from when the light comes on.Pull off the road as soon as possible withoutcreating a safety hazard.

See “Stop, Check, Info Symbols andAssociated Icons” page 137 for other telltalesthat trigger the STOP message light.

CAUTION

If an engine problem is allowed to persist,serious damage to the engine may occur.Always repair the cause of the problembefore operating the vehicle again.

Page 142: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Instruments and Controls 135

Warning MessageNote: This lamp ON means that there is aspecified fault that must be checked at thenext stop.

DANGER

The CHECK warning message lightsup when there is a specified fault thedriver should be aware of. Air pressure islow and remaining air volume may notbe sufficient for repeated braking. Theemergency brakes my engage, causinga wheel lockup, loss of vehicle control.This can cause the vehicle to become ahazard to vehicles behind it.Bring the vehicle to a controlled stop.Failure to follow these precautions canresult in loss of braking control, seriouspersonal injury, vehicle accident or death.

If there is an electrical or mechanicalproblem with the sensor, the CHECKwarning light comes on and a defaultmessage appears in the DID.

See “Stop, Check, Info Symbols andAssociated Icons” page 137 for other telltalesthat trigger the CHECK warning light.

W3005170

Page 143: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

136 Instruments and Controls

Information MessageNote: This indicator light ON means there isa new information message.

The INFO indicator light comes on whenthere is a new information message or anabnormal status is detected by the electroniccontrol unit. A telltale, text or both areshown in the DID in addition to the INFOlight. For certain telltales, a reference valueis also shown.

W3005150

Note: Make sure the indicated fault ischecked at the next stop once the INFOindicator come on.

See “Stop, Check, Info Symbols andAssociated Icons” page 137 for other telltalesthat trigger the INFO indicator.

Page 144: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Instruments and Controls 137

Stop, Check, Info Symbols and Associated IconsSymbols and Associated Icons

Icons Displayed

Page 145: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

138 Instruments and Controls

Symbols and Associated Icons

Icons Displayed

Page 146: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Instruments and Controls 139

Acknowledging MessagesA fault message is acknowledged bypressing “Esc” after which the displayreturns to the same status that existed beforethe fault occurred. All messages can beacknowledged. Acknowledged but inactivemessages are displayed again when theignition key is turned to the START positionor they can be read in the menu.

Information or Warning Messages:Information and warning messages can beacknowledged using the “Esc” button. Thiswarning stays acknowledged until the nexttime the ignition key is turned to the STARTposition.

Exceptions: The message can be displayedagain if the fault is corrected and thenbecomes active again.

Example: If the transmission fluidtemperature is too high, a message willbe activated automatically. The driveracknowledges this message using the “Esc”button. If the temperature then drops to anormal level temporarily and then increasesagain to an excessive level, the warning willactivate again.

Stop Message: The buzzer and a STOPmessage can be acknowledged using “Esc”but may become active again 10 secondsafter the last acknowledgment. The STOPsymbol will be illuminated the whole time.

Page 147: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

140 Instruments and Controls

Examples of Fault Symbolsand TextFactory–Installed Equipment WhenStationary:

The Stop, warning, or info symbol comeson and the information message is shownon the display (for more information on thefault, see “1. Fault Diagnostics” page 176).A warning tone will be heard if the engine isrunning when a stop message is activated.The message contains information aboutthe location of the fault where the fault hasoccurred:

STOPEngineFault

11:4575�F

AM

CC 7658.8 Mi

Non-Factory-Installed Equipment

If a coach builder or customer has retrofittedequipment that is connected to the data link,the following symbols may be displayed:

MID (Message IDentifier) = control unit

STOPMID 142

Fault

11:4575�F

AM

CC 7658.8 Mi

Page 148: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Instruments and Controls 141

Examples of Symbol + ValueInformation, warning or stop symbol comeson and another symbol + value is displayed.Example of warning message:

Warning, Freezing ConditionsThe Freezing conditions message is activatedwhen the outside temperature drops below35 F or increases from a lower temperatureto 28 F. Press “Esc” to acknowledge thewarning. The warning is cancelled when thetemperature drops below 26 F or rises to37 F.

Freezingconditions

28�F

11:4535�F

AM

CC 7658.8 Mi

Selecting a Menu1 Use “Up/Down arrow” /∇ to

move the cursor to the relevant menu,which is then highlighted.

2 Pressing “↵ ” moves the cursor to thehighlighted selection’s menu, it is alsoused as the “Enter” key.

3 Pressing “↵ ” confirms the choice.

4 “Esc” (Escape) is used to returnto the previous menu and cancel asetting/operation. Pressing “Esc” exitsthe chosen menu.

5 Pressing “Esc” repeatedly willsuccessively move the cursor “up” tothe main menus.

Gauges 2/6

Fuel data

Time/distance

Info display

11:4575�F

AM

CC 7658.8 Mi

Page 149: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

142 Instruments and Controls

Changing Settings1 “Up/Down arrow” /∇

increases/decreases set values(e.g. number of hours in adjacentexample).

2 Pressing “↵ ” confirms the choice andmoves on to the next position.

3 “Esc” moves the highlight to theprevious number or selection if there isany, otherwise the setting is cancelled.

Time/distance

11 : 45 001013

AM

11:4560�F

AM

CC 7658.8 Mi

Page 150: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Driver Information Display (DID) 143

DID, GeneralThe Driver Information Display (DID) is located in the center of the instrument cluster. Itcontains numerous main menus and sub-menus with their associated functions.The information available to the driver depends on vehicle configuration, and whether thevehicle is stationary or in operation. Certain functions are password-protected and are notshown until the correct password is entered.The DID gives the driver necessary and important information. There are three sections ofdisplay information in the DID:

Top Level Menu field

Middle Level Favorite Display

Bottom Level Status Bar and Odometer

W3005515

1 Driving Mode window2 Clock window3 Odometer window4 Favorite Display window5 Status window

Page 151: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

144 Driver Information Display (DID)

The two top sections/windows can be set up according to your personal preferences, whilethe third window could be considered a “favorite window” with information that the drivermay want to highlight more often. The bottom section/window stays unchanged andprovides status information required at all times.

DID, example screen view:

W3005172

1 1/6 indicates there are one of sixselections at this level. As you scrolldown you can change your selectionwithin the selected menu.

2 Clock/Time.

3 Miles/Kilometers.

4 Temperature

5 Shows present status icons (forexample: cruise control, engineretarder, engine Preheat)

6 Example of a favorite display selectedby the driver. (This example is theEngine oil temperature).

7 Shows Gauge menus, Warning &Information messages.

Page 152: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Driver Information Display (DID) 145

Stalk Switch Control LeverManual communication with the DID isachieved using the Stalk Switch ControlLever, located on the right-hand side of thesteering wheel.

The Stalk Switch allows the driver to selectan action he/she is required to take whenmessages are automatically displayed onthe DID. Certain information is displayedautomatically (e.g. Stop, Check and InfoIcons.).

W3005262

Stalk Switch Functions1 “Esc” (Escape) is used to return

to the previous menu and cancel asetting/operation.

2 Pressing “↵ ” moves the cursor to thehighlighted selection’s menu, it is alsoused as the “Enter” key.

3 “Up arrow” “�” moves the cursor upand is used to set numerical values.

4 “Down arrow” “�” moves the cursordown and is also used to set numericalvalues.

Page 153: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

146 Driver Information Display (DID)

DID MenuThe Driver Information Display screen(DID) has up to 13 main menus. There is aDriving and a Non-Driving menu. Severalsub-menus are password-protected whilethe vehicle is stationary. The Non-Drivingmenu is accessible only when the vehicle isstationary (parked).

Note: In order to view all menus at the sametime, the correct password must be given.This applies every time the ignition is turnedON and the vehicle is placed in the driveposition. See “Password” page 187.

Following is a flow chart which showsthe internal structure of the DID screens.Detailed screen-by-screen views of thisstructure are also outlined. For the DrivingMenu “screen” views see page 151 to page160. For Non Driving Menu “screen views,”see page 158 to page 188.

Page 154: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Driver Information Display (DID) 147

DID Structure, Driving Mode

W3006002

Page 155: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

148 Driver Information Display (DID)

W3005199

Page 156: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Driver Information Display (DID) 149

W3005200

Page 157: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

150 Driver Information Display (DID)

W3005201

Page 158: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Driver Information Display (DID) 151

Gauges in the DID(High and Mid Level Cluster Only)

There are several gauges in the “Gauges” menu. The number of gauges your vehicle isprogrammed with depends on the equipment level of the vehicle. The gauges are used toview current status of important functions in the vehicle.All gauges are programmed into the Instrument Cluster and are therefore visible only inthe DID.

Note: Eaton Autoshift equipped vehiclesalways have transmission/gear positiondisplayed at the bottom of the favoritesdisplay screen.

• Current Gear Position (AutomatedTransmission)

• Outside Temperature• Temperature, Engine Oil• Temperature, Transmission• Battery Voltage• Axle Temperature (Front/Rear)• Pressure Automatic Suspension

(Front/Rear)• Volvo Link Compass• Oil Level

1. Current Gear Position(Automated Transmission)Current Gear Position Gauge is standard.N= NeutralR= ReverseForward Gear = 1–18**Varies with type of transaction.With Autoshift and FreedomLine variantsthe Current Gear display is a fixed position:Bottom window.

Page 159: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

152 Driver Information Display (DID)

2. Outside TemperatureOutside temperature gauge is optional.

The outside temperature is displayed asillustrated.

Gauges 2/9

75 �F

11:4575�F

AM

CC 7658.8 Mi

3. Temperature, Engine OilThe engine oil temperature is displayed asillustrated.

Gauges 3/9

98�F

11:4575�F

AM

CC 7658.8 Mi

4. Temperature, Transmission Oil Gauges 4/9

98 �F

11:4598�F

AM

CC 7658.8 Mi

Page 160: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Driver Information Display (DID) 153

5. Battery Voltage

6. Axle Temperature (Front/Rear)

7. Pressure Automatic Suspension(Front and Rear)

Page 161: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

154 Driver Information Display (DID)

8. Volvo Link Compass

9. Oil Level

Page 162: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Driver Information Display (DID) 155

Fuel Data

The Fuel Data menu provides information on the fuel consumption of the vehicle in varioussituations; i.e., How much fuel has been used, how much fuel is remaining, how muchfuel is remaining before refueling vehicle.

• Instantaneous Gallons Per Hour• Trip Fuel used• Distance to Empty

1. Instantaneous Gallons Per hour Fuel data 1/3

ø 26.0↓

25.3⊥

11:4575�F

AM

CC 7658.8 Mi

2. Trip Fuel Used Fuel data 2/3

102 g

11:4575�F

AM

CC 7658.8 Mi

3. Distance to Empty Fuel data 3/3

265 km 80 g

11:4575�F

AM

CC 7658.8 Mi

Page 163: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

156 Driver Information Display (DID)

Time/Distance

The time and date can be set in the "TIME/DISTANCE" menu. The alarm clock can alsobe set from this menu. Following the alarm clock menu is the Distance to Destinationselection, which allows the driver see the distance since the last reset. Average trip speed isalso shown. By specifying the distance to your destination, the vehicle can calculate theestimated time of arrival (ETA).

• Time and Date• Alarm Clock• Distance to Destination• Average Trip Speed• Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA)

1. Time and Date Time/distance 1/5

00101311:45AM

11:4575�F

AM

CC 7658.8 Mi

Time/distance 1/5

ON

00:00 OFFNEW TIME

11:4575�F

AM

CC 7658.8 Mi

Page 164: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Driver Information Display (DID) 157

2. Alarm Clock Time/distance 2/5

00:00 OFF

11:4575�F

AM

CC 7658.8 Mi

3. Distance to Destination Time/distance 3/5

1 2

11:4575�F

AM

CC 7658.8 Mi

4. Trip Average Speed Time/distance 4/5

1 2

11:4575�F

AM

CC 7658.8 Mi

5. Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA) Time/distance 5/5

14:57

11:4575�F

AM

CC 7658.8 Mi

Page 165: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

158 Driver Information Display (DID)

Info Display

The driver can enter display setting in the “Info Display” menu. Night/Day can be selectedand the driver has the option of “dimming” the entire display for night driving or simply toadjust the brightness level. The “Favorite Display” function enables up to three differentgauges and functions to be displayed at the same time.

• Black Panel• Favorite Display• Backlight• Favorite Display Setting• Night/Day

1. Black PanelThe screen and the entire display iscompletely dark/black, except theSpeedometer and Tachometer.

Upon user or vehicle error, black panel modecan be exited by pressing “Esc.”

2. Favorite DisplayIf Favorite Display is selected, the DID willalways show your desired or selected gauge.

Note: This section is for viewing yourselection only. To choose your favoriteselection go to Favorite Display Setting.

Info display 2/5

Black Panel

Favorite Display

Backlight

11:4575�F

AM

CC 7658.8 Mi

Page 166: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Driver Information Display (DID) 159

3. BacklightTo increase or decrease the backlight setting,press “ ” or “ ∇” on your stalk switch.

Info display 3/5

11:4575�F

AM

CC 7658.8 Mi

4. Favorite Display SettingThis is where your selection is made for yourviewing.

75�F

75�F

11:4575�F

AM

CC 7658.8 Mi

5. Night/Day7.0 PSI

60 �F

11:4560 �F

AM

CC 7658.8 Mi

Page 167: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

160 Driver Information Display (DID)

Vehicle MessagesVehicle Messages appear in the DIDdepending on the number of faults thevehicle has at any given time.

Vehicle messages 1/1

11:4575�F

AM

CC 7658.8 Mi

If there are no messages: Vehicle messages 1/1

No messages

11:4575�F

AM

7658.8 Mi

ResetPressing and holding down the “↵ ” buttonfor more than 1 second resets the followingfunctions:Instantaneous Gallons per hourTrip Fuel usedDistance to empty

• Reset

Page 168: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Driver Information Display (DID) 161

DID Structure, Non Driving Mode

W3006006

Page 169: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

162 Driver Information Display (DID)

W3006007

Page 170: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Driver Information Display (DID) 163

W3006008

Page 171: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

164 Driver Information Display (DID)

W3006009

Page 172: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Driver Information Display (DID) 165

W3006010

Page 173: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

166 Driver Information Display (DID)

W3006011

Page 174: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Driver Information Display (DID) 167

W3006012

Page 175: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

168 Driver Information Display (DID)

W3006013

Page 176: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Driver Information Display (DID) 169

Display Setting

The display Setting menu is used to change between languages. The time and date can bechanged here also.

• Language• Units• Time/Date• Display/Adjust• Change Password1

1. LanguageDisplay setting

Language

EnglishEspanolFrancais

CC 7658.8 Mi

2. Units

• Distance

• Fuel Consumption

• Temperature

Distance

Display setting

UnitsDistance

kmmiles

CC 7658.8 Mi

1Password protected menu

Page 177: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

170 Driver Information Display (DID)

Fuel Consumption Display setting

UnitsFuel consumption

km/LL/100kmmpg (IMP gallons)mpg (US gallons)

CC 7658.8 Mi

Temperature Display setting

UnitsTemperature

�C�F

CC 7658.8 Mi

3. Time/DateThe “ Time/Date” menu has 2 sub-menus:

• Clock Format

• Date Format

Clock Format

Display setting

Time/DateClock FormatDate Format24 h

AM/PM

CC 7658.8 Mi

Page 178: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Driver Information Display (DID) 171

When “Date” is selected, the display showsyy = year, mm = month and dd = day (withthe current format marked):

Date Format

Display setting

Time/DateDate Format

yymmddddmmyymmddyy

CC 7658.8 Mi

4. Display AdjustThe “Display light” menu has 3 sub-menus:

• Contrast

• Backlight

• Night mode

Switch between the alternatives using“ /∇” arrows. Confirm selection pressing“↵ ”.

Press “Esc” to exit without changing thesetting.

Display setting

Display light

ContrastBacklightNight mode

CC 7658.8 Mi

When “Contrast” is selected the followingappears on the display.

Increase or decrease the contrast settingusing “ /∇” arrows. Confirm selection bypressing“↵ ”.

Press “Esc” to return to the main menu.

Contrast

Display settingDisplay light

Contrast

CC 7658.8 Mi

Page 179: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

172 Driver Information Display (DID)

When “Backlight” is selected the followingappears on the display.

Increase or decrease the Backlight settingusing “ /∇” arrows. Confirm selection bypressing“↵ ”.

Press “Esc” to return to the main menu.

Backlight

Display settingDisplay light

Backlight

CC 7658.8 Mi

The Night mode setting inverts the display.Instead of yellow text on a black background,the display shows black text on a yellowbackground.

Press “ /∇” arrows to move between thealternatives Disabled/Enabled. Confirmselection by pressing“↵ ”.

Press “Esc” to return to the main menu.

Night Mode

Display settingDisplay light

Night mode

DisabledEnabled

CC 7658.8 Mi

Page 180: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Driver Information Display (DID) 173

5. Change Password

This menu is only accessible if the correctpassword is entered (fleet password).

When “Display Setting”/ “Change Password”is selected from the menu the display showsthe following screen:

Display Setting

Change password

Enter Password for more Menus0 0 0 0

CC 7658.8 Mi

Page 181: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

174 Driver Information Display (DID)

Vehicle Settings

The "Vehicle Settings" menu allows fleet owners to set targets for vehicle operationregarding max. engine speed, max. road speed, and fuel consumption.

1. Fleet Limits

The “Fleet Limits” menu has 3 sub-menus:

• RPM Limit

• Speed Limit

• Fuel Target

Switch between the alternatives using“ /∇” arrows. Confirm selection bypressing “↵ ”.

Press “Esc” to return to the main menu.

Vehicle Settings

Fleet Limits:2000 rpm

Fleed ID:0 0 0 0 rpm

CC 7658.8 Mi

RPM Limit Vehicle Settings

Fleet Limits RPM limitSpeed Limit:

2000 rpmFuel Target:

0 0 0 0 rpm

CC 7658.8 Mi

Page 182: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Driver Information Display (DID) 175

Speed Limit Vehicle Settings

Fleet Limits RPM limit

Speed Limit:2000 rpm

Fuel Target:0 0 0 0 rpm

CC 7658.8 Mi

Fuel Target Vehicle Settings

Fleet LimitsPresent:

34 l/100 mSet new value:

0 0 l/100 m

CC 7658.8 Mi

2. Fleet ID

This menu can only be accessed if thecorrect password has been entered.

The owner can enter the fleet ID of thevehicle in this menu if required. Dataregistered in the engine control unit is thenregistered for this ID.

Select “Vehicle Setting” / “Fleet ID” fromthe menu. Enter the new Fleet ID using“ /∇” arrows. (enter one number at a timefollowed by “↵ ”). 13 characters must beentered (blank characters are entered inunused positions).

Key cycle is required to update fleet ID.

Vehicle Settings

Fleet ID

Fleet ID:XXXX

Enter new Fleet ID:

CC 7658.8 Mi

Page 183: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

176 Driver Information Display (DID)

Diagnostics

The Diagnostics Menu enables fault tracing on the control units in the vehicle to check forfaults. It is also possible to run an instrument test to check the integrity of the gauges andLEDs. The part number of the control unit can be identified from the part number menu.

1. Fault Diagnostics

A list of the control units on the vehicle isdisplayed in the “Fault diagnostic” menu.

Select the control unit using “ /∇” arrows.

“↵ ” confirms the control unit selection. Tocancel press "Esc."

Fault Diagnostics

Diagnostics 1/3 Engine ECU

Fault Diagnostics Transmission ECU

Cluster Self Test ⇒ Brakes ECU

Part Number Info Display

Vehicle ECU

Climate Control

CC 7658.8 Mi SRS Air Bag ECU

Steering Wheel Module

Bodybuilder Module

Volvo Link

Page 184: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Driver Information Display (DID) 177

2. Cluster Self Test

There are four sub-menus available:

• Telltales test• Gauge test• Display test• Speaker test

Select a test to be run. The following tablelists the result of selecting any test.

To CANCEL any test press ESC.

Telltales Test

• Control lamps come on forapproximately five seconds.

Gauge Test• The indicators move forwards and

backwards between the end positions,then stay pointing straight up.

• They do not show any particular value.This is just a check to see that theindicators move, and to make sure thedrivers are working.

Display Test• The entire display lights up for three

seconds and then goes off for threeseconds.

• After the three seconds is up, the DIDwill turn to a checkered pattern. This isinverted for about three seconds.

Speaker Test• The sound is activated and at the same

time, the name of the selected sound isshown in the DID screen.

Page 185: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

178 Driver Information Display (DID)

3. Part Number

A list of the control units on board the vehicleis displayed in the “Part Number” menu.

Part Number

Diagnostics 3/3 Engine ECU

Fault Diagnostics Transmission ECU

Cluster Self Test ⇒ Info Display

Part Number Vehicle ECU

Climate Control

Light Control Module

CC 7658.8 Mi SRS Air bag ECU

Steering Wheel Module

Bodybuilder Module

Volvo Link

Page 186: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Driver Information Display (DID) 179

1 “ /∇” moves the cursor through thelist.

2 Pressing “↵ ” confirms the control unitselection.

3 The display shows:

Diagnostics

Fault Diagnostics

EnBr Data transferLH in progress,LH please wait.TrVehicle ECUInfo Display

CC 7658.8 Mi

4 The following message is displayed:

DiagnosticsPart number

Info display

Hardware number:020428693P0101392017 250901Software number:20428728.P0120428654.P0120428732.P01

CC 7658.8 Mi

5 If there is a communication error, thedisplay shows:

DiagnosticsPart numberHardware number:No data

Software number:No data

CC 7658.8 Mi

Page 187: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

180 Driver Information Display (DID)

Vehicle Data

The engine oil level can be checked in the "Vehicle Data" menu.

1. Oil Level(Volvo)The vehicle is equipped with an electronicoil level sensor.

The bar marked MIN and MAX shows theengine oil level. The number in the middleindicates the difference in liters between theMIN and MAX level.

The engine oil level is also displayed whenthe key is turned to the ON position. It isdisplayed for 5 seconds or until the engine isstarted and is shown directly after SRS andthe welcome message.

For the reading to be correct, the enginemust have been switched off for at least70 minutes. If the engine has not beenswitched off for long enough, the numberof minutes delay until the gauge is able toshow an accurate reading will be displayed,see illustration.

If the engine oil level is at MIN or belowMIN a warning message is displayed, seeillustration.

Note: No low oil level warning is displayedwhile driving.

Note: The engine oil level should be betweenMIN and MAX. Do not top up with oil untilthe level is near MIN. Too much oil in theengine can increase oil consumption.

Time to correct value:

ServiceOil level

Correct value within 5min.

min< 6 L >max

CC 7658.8 Mi

Low Oil Level:

min< 6 L >maxCC 7658.8 Mi

Page 188: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Driver Information Display (DID) 181

DataLog1. Vehicle ID

The Datalog Menu has several sub-menus that are not password-protected and one sub-menuthat is password-protected.

1 Select “Datalog” / “Vehicle ID”

2 The fleet ID that is displayed has beenentered in the menu.

Press “Esc” to return to the previousmenu.

DatalogVehicle ID

Fleet ID:0000000

Chassis number:0000000

CC 7658.8 Mi

3 If the transfer should fail, the followingmessage is shown:

DatalogVehicle ID

Operationfailed

CC 7658.8 Mi

Page 189: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

182 Driver Information Display (DID)

2. Total Data

Totals indicate the accumulated enginevalues that have been logged during thelifetime of the engine ECU. Six differenttotals are stored.

1 Select “Datalog” / “Total data.”

2 The menus showing “Total Data” canbe scrolled through one by one on thelist using “ /∇” arrows. Two totals areshown at a time. Press “Esc” to quit.

3

DatalogTotal dataTotal vehicle distance:

0.0 Mi

Totalfuel used:

0.0 l

CC 7658.8 Mi

4

DatalogTotal data

Total number of hoursengine hours:

0.0 h

Total idle time:

0.0 h

CC 7658.8 Mi

5

DatalogTotal data

TotalPTO hours:

0.0 hTotal enginerevolutions:

0 r

CC 7658.8 Mi

6 If the data transfer is unsuccessful, “Nodata” is displayed where data is missing.

Page 190: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Driver Information Display (DID) 183

3. Trip Data

There are 14 different trip data values stored.

Note: The trip data must be reset beforeeach measurement, see “4. Reset Trip Data”page 185 .

1 Select Datalog, Trip data.

2 Trip values are shown two at a time ona scroll list and can be browsed using“ /∇” arrows. The available trip datais listed below.

Press “Esc” to quit.

If the data transfer is unsuccessful, “No data”is displayed where data is missing.

DatalogTrip dataTrip distancetrip:

000 Mi

Trip fuelaverage:

0.0 l/Mi

CC 7658.8 Mi

Page 191: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

184 Driver Information Display (DID)

Trip data, scrolling list

Trip Trip-

distance: overspeed:

000 km 0.0 h

Trip fuel Trip

average: engine hours:

0.0 l/km 0.0 h

Trip Trip

fuel avg: idle time:

0.0 l/km 0.0 h

Trip Trip

overrev’s: idle fuel:

0.0 h 0.0 l

Trip uneconomy Trip PTO

rev’s: hours:

0.0 h 0.0 h

Trip fuel Trip PTO

uneconomy rev’s: fuel:

0.0 l 0.0 l

Trip average Trip

speed: Cruise:

0.0 mp/h 0.0 h

Page 192: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Driver Information Display (DID) 185

4. Reset Trip Data

This menu can only be accessed if thecorrect password has been entered.

1 Select “Datalog” / “Reset trip data.”

2 Select Reset. Press “↵ ” Press “Esc”to quit.

DatalogReset trip data

Reset allTrip data?Hold for 1s.

CC 7658.8 Mi

3

DatalogReset trip dataReset allre Data transferTr in progress,

please wait

CC 7658.8 Mi

4 The following message is thendisplayed:

DatalogReset trip data

Reset allre OperationTr complete.

CC 7658.8 Mi

Page 193: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

186 Driver Information Display (DID)

5 If the reset fails, the following messageis displayed:

DatalogReset trip data

Reset allre OperationTr failed

CC 7658.8 Mi

Page 194: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Driver Information Display (DID) 187

Password

Certain functions are password-protected and there are a number of passwords for thedisplay (it is also possible to disable the password protection for functions, which is usefulwhen the owner is the driver. Contact your local Volvo dealer to set this function).

1. Password

These passwords give the user access to allpassword-protected functions.

Note: This password must be changed toprevent unauthorized access to the menus.

See “5. Change Password” page 173 tochange the password.

Switch between the alternatives using“ /∇” arrows. Confirm selection bypressing “↵ ”. Press “Esc” to return to themain menu.

The following menus are password-protectedand marked with a key symbol in the menus:

• Fleet Limits

• Fleet ID

• Reset (applies to a number of functions)

When the ignition key has been in thestop position for more than 60 seconds orthe batteries have been disconnected, thepassword must be entered again in order toaccess all the functions.

No functions should be password-protected:

To make all menus available withoutpassword you must go to:“Password” and press “↵ ”.

You can also go to a password-protectedmenu and press “↵ ”. A password entry boxis displayed.

Page 195: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

188 Driver Information Display (DID)

1 Select the “Password” menu.

2 The password consists of a four-digitnumber, 0000–9999, that is scrolledforward using “ /∇” arrows on thecontrol lever (one number at a time)followed by pressing “↵ ”. The displayshows the following:

Press “↵ ” when the correct passwordhas been entered.

Note: If the ignition key has been in thestop position for more than 60 secondsor the batteries have been disconnected,the password must be entered again inorder to access all the functions.

3 If an incorrect password is entered, theuser is returned to point 2. Re-enterthe password using “ /∇” arrows,followed by “↵ ” on the control stalk asin point 2.

Display settingVehicle settingDiagnosticsService

Datalog

Password

CC 7658.8 Mi

Password

For more menusEnter the password:

0000

CC 7658.8 Mi

Page 196: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Driver Information Display (DID) 189

Performance Bonus FeatureDescription• The Performance Bonus Feature is a

tool used to promote driver efficiency.• This feature rewards the driver with a

higher Road Speed Limit (RSL) only ifthe performance targets set by the fleetmanagement are achieved.Targets are set based upon fueleconomy, idle time or a combinationof both.

• The reward of higher RSL increasesdriver productivity and income, it alsopromotes increased driver and fuelefficiency.

To obtain more information about thePerformance Bonus Feature contact yourVolvo dealer.

Note: The Performance Bonus Featureis programmable (by your dealer) usingVCADS Pro or VCADS Pro Elite.

W3006014

Performance Bonus Status RewardDriver reward is shown in the DriverInformation Display screen (DID). Oncethe ignition is turned ON, the PerformanceBonus status appears and remains on thescreen for 15 seconds. See illustration.

Note: Only priority 1 messages willtemporarily close the rewards status menu.

W3006015

Page 197: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

190 Driver Information Display (DID)

Rolling BufferThe “rolling buffer” is set to measuredistance driven. The buffer may be set at ashort or long distance. A short buffer resultsin a faster reward, (or loss of reward) whichprovides driving fuel economy training to thedriver, permitting the driver easy memoryof the input to the buffer during this shortperiod of time.

A long buffer setting allows for the dailyactivities to “smooth out”. In this case thereward is based on weekly/monthly activity. The DID will inform the

Performance Bonus status byshowing the actual status and targetwithin the parenthesis.

The DID will inform thePerformance Bonus status byshowing the actual status and targetwithin the parenthesis.

Page 198: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Heating and Air Conditioning 191

GeneralThe Air Conditioning System comprisesthree different units. Depending on yourvehicle, you will have one of these three AirConditioning units installed:1. Electronic Climate Control (ECC)2. Manual Climate Control (MCC)3. Heater Only

Air Conditioning Electronic Climate Control (ECC)ECC Controls:

1 AC OFF button: turns the airconditioning OFF. The arrow in theillustration shows the LED light whichis AMBER or RED indicating the ACcompressor is OFF.The ECC will still try to maintain theselected temperature in the cab withoutthe compressor.

2 Temperature knob3 Fan speed knob4 Recirculation button5 Air distribution knob W8003062

RecirculationPress recirculation to circulate the air in thecab. Only a small amount of air is takendirectly from outside.

W8003074

The light in the button comes onwhen the button is pressed for airrecirculation.

Page 199: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

192 Heating and Air Conditioning

Temperature Control Settings ECCMaximum Cold Setting

The temperature control setting asshown in the illustration, will try to coolthe cab as cold as possible.

W8003063

Maximum Heat SettingThe temperature control setting asshown in the illustration, will try to heatthe cab as to the maximum.

W8003064

Page 200: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Heating and Air Conditioning 193

Normal Setting• When the temperature control is set

to any temperature between 64 and80 the ECC automatically adjustsitself close to the selected temperature,similar to a thermostat.

W8003065

Fan SpeedThe fan speeds are 1 through 4. The fan willnot operate when “0” is selected, but air willflow when set to fresh air mode due to ramair effect when the truck is moving.

W8003075

• The ECC automatically circulatesair at fan speed 4 when there is abig difference between the selectedtemperature and the temperaturemeasured by the in-cab sensor.However, as the temperature in the cabgets closer to the selected temperature,the fan speed begins to slow down.

• If maximum cold or maximum heatare selected, the ECC automaticallycirculates air at fan speed 4 when AUTis selected. At any other selected fanspeed the system adjusts and conformsto the chosen speed.

Page 201: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

194 Heating and Air Conditioning

Mist and Ice Removal• Turn knob to defrost.• Rotate the temperature knob to add heat

as necessary.• Set the fan to maximum (the extreme

right).

Read these instructions to be able to hold thewindshield clear at all times. Maximum heatoutput for fast defrosting can only happenafter the engine has reached operatingtemperature.

While driving in extreme cold, adding heatto the windshield may change drifting snowto ice, in this case, setting the air distributionto floor and/or panel only may allowthe drifting snow to be brushed off by thewindshield wiper.

Clean the inside of the window using normalwindow cleaner in order to minimize the riskof misting. Clean more often if a passengersmokes in the cab.

DANGER

DO NOT attempt to drive with thewindshield covered by mist, or fog orfrost. The visibility is reduced, whichcould lead to an accident causing severepersonal injury or death.

W8003068

Page 202: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Heating and Air Conditioning 195

Air Distribution

W8003067

1 Temperature Sensor

CAUTION

The temperature sensor shown in theillustration, detects the temperature inthe cab. DO NOT cover the sensor, andDO NOT place warm objects, like coffeemakers or refrigerators, close to thesensor.

Page 203: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

196 Heating and Air Conditioning

Air Distribution Continued

Note: This applies to all three Airconditioning systems; ECC, MCC andHeater Only:After a pre-determined number of“vehicle starts” the climate unit willrecalibrate the door positions, which maytake several seconds before the airflowreturns to the selected distribution mode.

Always allow the dashboard vents (seearrows in illustration) to remain open.Irrespective of how the air distribution isset, a small amount of air will always comefrom the dashboard vents to ensure thetemperature in the cab is correct.

Note: Floor Mode: Unheated air is leaked tothe panel vent to balance the heat rising fromthe floor.

Page 204: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Heating and Air Conditioning 197

Air Conditioning Manual Climate Control (MCC)One difference in the Manual ClimateControl unit is the AC ON button.

MCC Controls:

1 AC ON button turns the air conditioningON.

Note: The LED light is green when theAC button is depressed.When the AC ON button is NOTdepressed and the compressor or AC isheard, this is not a fault in the system.The AC will operate in defrost modewhether the AC ON button is depressedor not.

2 Temperature control knob.3 Fan speed knob.4 Recirculation button.5 Air distribution knob.

W8003066

RecirculationPress recirculation to circulate the air in thecab. Only a small amount of air is takendirectly from outside.

W8003074

The light in the button comes onwhen the button is pressed for airrecirculation.

Page 205: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

198 Heating and Air Conditioning

Temperature Control Settings MCCCool and Hot Temperature Settings

Move the knob to the blue bar for coolair to circulate in the cab, and to thered bar for warm to hot air to circulatethe cab. Select the desired fan speedstarting from 1 to 4. “0” is not a fanspeed.

W8003069

Page 206: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Heating and Air Conditioning 199

Mist and Ice Removal• Turn knob to defrost.• Rotate the temperature knob to add heat

as necessary.• Set the fan to maximum (the extreme

right).

Read these instructions to be able to hold thewindshield clear at all times. Maximum heatoutput for fast defrosting can only happenafter the engine has reached operatingtemperature.

While driving in extreme cold, adding heatto the windshield may change drifting snowto ice, in this case, setting the air distributionto floor and/or panel only may allowthe drifting snow to be brushed off by thewindshield wiper.

Clean the inside of the window using normalwindow cleaner in order to minimize the riskof misting. Clean more often if a passengersmokes in the cab.

DANGER

DO NOT attempt to drive with thewindshield covered by mist, or fog orfrost. The visibility is reduced, whichcould lead to an accident causing severepersonal injury or death.

W8003072

Page 207: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

200 Heating and Air Conditioning

Air Distribution

W8003110

Note: This applies to all three Airconditioning systems; ECC, MCC andHeater Only:After a pre-determined number of“vehicle starts” the climate unit willrecalibrate the door positions, which maytake several seconds before the airflowreturns to the selected distribution mode.

Always allow the dashboard vents (seearrows in illustration) to remain open.Irrespective of how the air distribution isset, a small amount of air will always comefrom the dashboard vents to ensure thetemperature in the cab is correct.

Note: Floor Mode: Unheated air is leaked tothe panel vent to balance the heat rising fromthe floor.

Page 208: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Heating and Air Conditioning 201

Heater OnlyModels or vehicles equipped with heateronly are not equipped with AC ON or ACOFF button.

Heater Only Controls:

1 Temperature control knob.2 Fan speed knob.3 Recirculation button.4 Air distribution knob.

W8003073

RecirculationPress recirculation to circulate the air in thecab. Only a small amount of air is takendirectly from outside.

W8003074

The light in the button comes onwhen the button is pressed for airrecirculation.

Page 209: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

202 Heating and Air Conditioning

Mist and Ice Removal• Turn knob to defrost.• Rotate the temperature knob to add heat

as necessary.• Set the fan to maximum (the extreme

right).

Read these instructions to be able to hold thewindshield clear at all times. Maximum heatoutput for fast defrosting can only happenafter the engine has reached operatingtemperature.

While driving in extreme cold, adding heatto the windshield may change drifting snowto ice, in this case, setting the air distributionto floor and/or panel only may allowthe drifting snow to be brushed off by thewindshield wiper.

Clean the inside of the window using normalwindow cleaner in order to minimize therisk of misting. Clean more often if anyonesmokes in the cab.

DANGER

DO NOT attempt to drive with thewindshield covered by mist, or fog orfrost. The visibility is reduced, whichcould lead to an accident causing severepersonal injury or death.

W8003076

Page 210: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Heating and Air Conditioning 203

Air Distribution

W8003110

Note: This applies to all three Airconditioning systems; ECC, MCC andHeater Only:After a pre-determined number of“vehicle starts” the climate unit willrecalibrate the door positions, which maytake several seconds before the airflowreturns to the selected distribution mode.

Always allow the dashboard vents (seearrows in illustration) to remain open.Irrespective of how the air distribution isset, a small amount of air will always comefrom the dashboard vents to ensure thetemperature in the cab is correct.

Note: Floor Mode: Unheated air is leaked tothe panel vent to balance the heat rising fromthe floor.

Page 211: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

204 Heating and Air Conditioning

Cab VentilationVentilation GuidelinesIf at any time there is any question whetherexhaust fumes are entering the cab,determine the cause of the fumes and have itcorrected as soon as possible. If the vehiclemust be driven under these conditions, driveonly with all windows open.

Protect against carbon monoxide entry intothe cab. Keep the engine exhaust system,cab and cab ventilation system properlymaintained. It is recommended that theexhaust system and cab are inspected by acompetent technician:

• At every engine oil change.

• Whenever a change is noticed in thesound of the exhaust system.

• Whenever the exhaust system,underbody or cab is damaged.

DANGER

DO NOT breathe the engine exhaustgas. It contains carbon monoxide, whichhas no color or odor. Carbon monoxideis a dangerous gas which can causeunconsciousness or death.

DANGER

Diesel engine exhaust and some ofits content are known to the state ofCalifornia to cause cancer, birth defectsor other reproductive harm.

To allow proper operation of the vehicleventilation system, keep the inlet grille at thebase of the windshield clear of snow, ice,leaves and other obstructions at all times.

DO NOT park the vehicle and let the enginerun or idle for more than 10 minutes withthe ventilation system control switch in theOFF position. Even with the ventilationsystem ON, running the engine while parkedor stopped for long periods of time is notrecommended. Entry of carbon monoxideinto the cab is possible with a poorlyrepaired, damaged or corroded exhaustsystem or cab.

DO NOT run the engine in confined areas,such as garages or next to a building, anymore than necessary. The area must beproperly ventilated. When the vehicle mustbe stopped with the engine running for morethan a few minutes:

• Adjust the heating or cooling system toforce outside air into the cab. Do thisby setting the fan to medium or highspeed and with the controls set in anyposition except for recirculation of airinside of the cab.

• Keep the exhaust pipe area clear to helpreduce the buildup of exhaust gas underthe vehicle.

Page 212: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Heating and Air Conditioning 205

Cab Ventilation SleepersIn sleeper versions (except the VN 780) thereis a fresh air vent located on each cab sidewall. It opens to two positions so the air flowcan be regulated.

The vent also opens toward the front ortoward the rear. This can be used for forcingair into the cab (open toward the front) orfor venting air out of the cab (open towardthe rear).

CAUTION

The vent should not be used duringrain, while washing the vehicle or othercircumstances where water may enter thecab while the vent is open. To preventleaks, make sure the handle rollers are onthe top center part of the cams. W8003135

The VN 780 is equipped with 4 hinged sidewindows in the sleeper area. The VN 670 hasonly the upper windows. DO NOT force thewindow crank mechanism in the fully openposition. The mechanism can be damaged ifyou try to open the window beyond the stopposition.

CAUTION

Make sure windows are closed beforewashing the cab. Water can enter the cabthrough the window opening.

W8003136

Page 213: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

206 Heating and Air Conditioning

Sleeper Climate Unit VNGeneralThe sleeper cabs have an A/C and heater unitthat is located in the passenger side luggagecompartment. The sleeper unit operates fromthe same heater and air conditioning supplyas the main unit. The heater can be operatedindependently from the main unit as long asthe engine is running.

For the air conditioning to operate, theengine must be running, the air conditioningbutton must be pressed in and the fan controlmust be set at least for speed 1 on the maincontrol panel.

Air is taken from the sleeper area througha filter in the lower bunk support wall andheated or cooled in the “underbunk” unit.Outlet air can be directed with the vents inthe side walls.

For the best results when using the airconditioning, direct the air flow upward inthe sleeper area.

Page 214: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Heating and Air Conditioning 207

Air VentsA Closed

B Open

C Vertical Air Flow

D Lateral Air Flow

When heating the cab, all vents should beclosed. However, the vents on the outerparts of the dash can be used for defrostingthe cab door windows. When operatingthe air conditioning, all air vents should becompletely open and the air flow directedupward.

Page 215: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

208 Heating and Air Conditioning

Cab Air FiltersAir going into the cab passes a filter locatedon the right, front side of the cab. Removethe filter and clean with an air gun (no morethan 20 psi pressure) after70,000 miles (112,000 km), (in dustyconditions as often as every 20,000 miles[32,000 km]). Make sure the air stream isdirected from the inside out.

The filter should not be cleaned and reusedmore than once. Replace with a new filterafter maximum 70,000 miles (112,000 km),or earlier if driving in dusty conditions. Aclogged filter decreases the efficiency of theair conditioning system.

W8003189

If the vehicle is equipped with a sleeperheater-A/C, there is a filter for recirculatingair. This is located behind the passenger seaton the bunk support. The filter should bechecked and cleaned after70,000 miles (112,000 km), (in dustyconditions as often as every 20,000 miles[32,000 km]). Clean as the cab air filter.Replace filter after 100,000 miles(160,000 km).

To inspect or to change the filter, openluggage storage lid and pull out filter.

Page 216: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Heating and Air Conditioning 209

Sleeper Control Panel (Sleeper Models Only)The sleeper control module is locatedbehind the driver’s seat. It provides precisetemperature control to the sleeper unit. Thereare separate temperature and fan controlsystems for the sleeper and the cab area.Also, the driver can control the fan speedin the sleeper using a control switch on thedash.

W3005273

1 Panel in VN 7802 Panel in VN 430, 630 & 670

This dual control usage provides optimumcomfort to the driver and passenger (if any)in both compartments. The sleeper controlmodule is used to operate the following:

• Auxiliary Heating, Venting and AirConditioning

• Alarm Clock/Timer• Interior Sleeper Lights• Circuit Protection (fuses)• Battery Voltage Protection

(see page 324.)• Parking Heater (Optional)

W3005382

Page 217: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

210 Heating and Air Conditioning

Sleeper Controls

W3005163

1 Overhead Lamp Switch: This can becontrolled from the sleeper controlmodule or from the dash rocker switch.

2 Speaker: Sounds when the alarm ortimer goes off, or when entering batteryprotection mode.

3 Display Screen: Displays selectedinformation.

4 Menu Control Buttons: These buttonsare used to make selections in thedisplay screen.

5 Temperature Control Knob: Controlstemperature for the Parking Heater and

the Auxiliary Heating, Venting and AirConditioning (A-HVAC).

6 Fuses.

7 Fan Speed Control switch: This canbe controlled from the sleeper controlmodule or from the dash rocker switch.

8 LED: The LED illuminates when thefan is on.The LED also flashes when it is inbattery protection mode.

Page 218: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Heating and Air Conditioning 211

Display ScreenThe display screen contains LED icons forHEAT, SET, IDLE, TIMER, �F, �C, AM,PM, & ALARM. Press the Menu/Snoozebar to rotate through TIME DISPLAY,ALARM, HEAT & TIMER menus.

W3005167

Underneath the display screen there are fivepush buttons:

SET Establishes values andconfirms any selectionmade

ON/OFF Turns ALARM, TIMERor DISPLAY ON/OFF

+ Adds increments

– Reduces increments

Press and hold downthe +/- button for rapidadvance.

Menu/SnoozeBar

Pressing theMenu/Snooze bar,moves you through TIMEDISPLAY, ALARM,HEAT and TIMER menusin the display screen.

SnoozeFunction

Pressing Snooze disablesthe buzzer for sevenminutes (when the alarmor timer is on)(From a sub menu)Pressing Snooze can beused to exit the menu,without saving the value.

Note: Snooze turns off the TIMER for 7minutes.

Page 219: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

212 Heating and Air Conditioning

Setting Display Time/ClockNote: Press MENU/SNOOZE to togglebetween TIME DISPLAY, ALARM, HEATand TIMER menus until desired icon isdisplayed.

Press the SET button.The SET indicator comes on.Choose 24 hr or 12 hr format by pressingeither the + or – buttons.Press SET again.

The hour digits are flashing.Set the time to the desired hour by pressing+ or – buttons. Press SET.

The minute digits are flashing.Set time to the desired minute by pressing+ or – buttons.Press SET.

The SET indicator disappears.

The Time is set.

Note: After 7 seconds of inactivity, theTime/Clock setting returns to the timedisplay screen. Press the SET button torestart.

Note: Only 12 hr format shows AM/PMsymbols.

W3005168

Page 220: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Heating and Air Conditioning 213

Setting AlarmNote: Press MENU/SNOOZE to togglebetween TIME DISPLAY, ALARM, HEATand TIMER menus until desired icon isdisplayed.

Press the ON/OFF button to set ALARMON or OFF.

Press the SET button to set the time.SET is displayed on the screen.

The hour digits are flashing.Set the desired hour by pressing the + or– buttons. Press SET again to confirmselection.

The minute digits are flashing.Set the desired minutes by pressing the +or – buttons. Press SET again to confirmselection.

The ALARM indicator remains on and theSET indicator disappears.

The Alarm is set.

Note: After 7 seconds of inactivity, theTime/Clock setting returns to the timedisplay screen. Press the SET button torestart.

W3005168

Page 221: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

214 Heating and Air Conditioning

Setting Parking HeaterNote: Press MENU/SNOOZE to togglebetween TIME DISPLAY, ALARM, HEATand TIMER menus until desired icon isdisplayed.

Press ON/OFF button to immediately turnon the Manual HEAt.

Press SET to select three different modesand time.SET is displayed at the top left of the displayscreen.

Press the + or – buttons to toggle betweenHEAt/AUtO/CYCL.HEAt: Manually turn ON and OFF.AUtO: Set a time in the future toautomatically turn on.CYCL: Set one time to continuously cyclebetween ON and OFF.

When the selection is complete, for example,select AUtO and press SET.Current ON or OFF status is displayed.Make desired selection by pressing ON/OFFbutton.Press SET.

(continued on next page)

W3005168

Page 222: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Heating and Air Conditioning 215

Hour digits flashingPress the + or – buttons to select the desiredhour.Press SET, the houris set.

Minute digits flashing.Press the + or – buttons to select the desiredminutes.Press SET, the minute is set.

The SET indicator at the top left of thedisplay screen disappears.The HEAT indicator remains at the top leftof the display screen.

The Automatic Heater is set.

Note: After 7 seconds of inactivity, theTime/Clock setting returns to the timedisplay screen. Press the SET button torestart.

W3005168

Page 223: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

216 Heating and Air Conditioning

Setting TimerNote: Press MENU/SNOOZE to togglebetween TIME DISPLAY, ALARM, HEATand TIMER menus until desired icon isdisplayed.

The display will flash between the ON/OFFand the TIMER value.Press ON/OFF button to select ON or OFFstatus (when TIMER value is not 0:00).

Press SET to select time.

SET is displayed on the display screen.

The Minute digits are flashing.Press + or – buttons to select desiredminute.Press SET to confirm selection.

The Seconds digits are flashing.Press + or – buttons to select desiredseconds. Press SET to confirm selection.

The SET indicator disappears, TIMERremains at the bottom left of the display, andthe menu returns to the TIME DISPLAY.Press and hold MENU/SNOOZE for onesecond to constantly display the TIMER.

Note: the Alarm will sound when theTIMER count reaches 0:00.Press ON/OFF button to turn OFF alarm forTIMER.

Note: Snooze turns off the TIMER for 7minutes.

Note: After 7 seconds of inactivity, theTime/Clock setting returns to the timedisplay screen. Press the SET button torestart.

W3005168

Page 224: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Heating and Air Conditioning 217

Parking Heater (Optional, Sleeper Models Only)

DANGER

DO NOT fuel the vehicle or handleflammable liquids in the vicinity of anoperating parking heater. The fuel vaporscan be ignited, causing an explosion orfire resulting in severe personal injury ordeath.

DANGER

DO NOT store flammable items close tothe parking heater or put items on top ofit. Flammable items should not be closerthan 2 inches (50 mm). The item mayignite and cause a fire resulting in severepersonal injury or death.

DANGER

DO NOT run heater while vehicle is in anenclosed area. The exhaust gasses containcarbon monoxide (CO). If not vented tothe atmosphere, there could be a buildupof dangerous levels of CO which maylead to unconsciousness and later death.

WARNING

The parking heater is a very hot object.DO NOT touch the heater when it is inoperation or shortly thereafter. Touchinga heater may cause burns to exposed skin.

CAUTION

The heater air inlet is located in thebunk wall in front of the heater. DONOT attempt to put small items or storeflat items between the bunk and thecabinet/refrigerator. The air intake canbe blocked which causes the heater tooverheat and shut down.

The parking heater is a diesel fuel burner thatheats the air in the cab. Air is taken fromthe cab and returned heated. Combustion airand exhaust is taken from, and released tothe outside air.

To safeguard from the heater operating aftera turnover accident, there is a fuel shut-offvalve in the fuel delivery system.

Page 225: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

218 Heating and Air Conditioning

Fuel Parking HeaterA fuel heated parking heater is availableas an option. It is located in the lefthand luggage compartment. The heaterprovides automatically regulated heat thatis distributed through its own vents into thesleeper section of the cab.

W8002480

Page 226: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Seats 219

GeneralSeveral seats can be used in the vehicles.If the seat installed in the vehicle is notexplained in this section, see your authorizedVolvo dealer.

Before adjusting or fastening the seat belt,move the seat forward or rearward and adjustthe seat height as necessary. Sit erect andadjust the seat cushion and seat back toobtain a comfortable driving position.

DANGER

All adjustments are to be made whilethe operator is seated and the vehicleis stationary. DO NOT adjust the seatposition while driving the vehicle. Failureto follow this warning can result in lossof vehicle control, which can result inserious personal injury or death in theevent of a vehicle accident.

Driver Seats• Isringhausen Standard Seat• Isringhausen Comfort Seat• Isringhausen Deluxe Seat• National Standard Seat• National Comfort Seat

Passenger SeatsNote: Sleeper Cabs may also beequipped with Standard, Comfort andDeluxe Seats on the passenger side.2

• Isringhausen ToolBox/Passenger Seat• Isringhausen Bench/Passenger Seat• Isringhausen Static/Passenger Seat

(Tubular Frame)

2For Isringhausen seats only.

Page 227: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

220 Seats

Isringhausen Standard SeatThe Isringhausen Standard Seat provides adjustable and foldable Backrest, lumbar supportfront tilt, air suspension, fore and aft isolator and seat belt reminder.

Standard Features• Neck Support• Backrest Adjustment• Armrest (one or both sides) *Optional• Height Adjustment• Length Adjustment (fore/aft)• Foldable Backrest• Lumbar Support adjustment• Front Tilt adjustment• Air Suspension (150 kg)• Fore/Aft Isolator (lockable)• Autoshift controls (driver side)

W8003111

Isringhausen Standard Seat

Isringhausen StandardSeat Adjustments1 Move the handle up to adjust the entire

seat forward or backward.2 Pull button up to tilt seat.3 Push the control button down to adjust

the seat height.4 Lumbar support/Heater Switch.5 Fore/aft Isolator (lockable).6 Push the control button up to incline the

upper part of the backrest.Push the control button up to incline theentire backrest.

W8003133

Page 228: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Seats 221

Isringhausen Comfort SeatThe Isringhausen Comfort and Standard Seats are similar, however the Isringhausen ComfortSeat offers more features/options, which are highlighted for easy identification.

Comfort Features• Neck Support• Backrest Adjustment• Armrest (one or both sides) *Optional• Height Adjustment• Length Adjustment (fore/aft)• Foldable Backrest• Lumbar Support adjustment• Front Tilt adjustment• Air Suspension (150 kg)• Fore/Aft Isolator (lockable)• Adjustable Shock Absorber• Autoshift controls (driver side)• Seat Cushion Extension Adjust• Shoulder Adjustment• Memory Height Position (limiter)• Heated Cushions *Optional• Swivelling Base Seat *Optional

T8009149

Isringhausen Comfort Seat

Isringhausen Comfort Seat Adjustments1 Lift lever up to move the cushion

forward or backward.2 Move the handle up to adjust the entire

seat forward or backward.3 Damping (Adjustable Shock Absorber).4 Pull button up to tilt seat.5 Pushing the control button up or down

moves the entire seat vertically.6 Lumbar7 Heating (Optional).8 Fore/aft Isolator (lockable)9 Push the control button up to incline the

upper part of the backrest.10 Push the control button up to incline the

entire backrest.W8003132

Page 229: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

222 Seats

Isringhausen Deluxe Seat VN 780 OnlyDeluxe Features

The Isringhausen Deluxe Seat is Volvo’s top of the line seat.

• Neck Support• Backrest Adjustment (power)• Armrest (one or both sides) *Optional• Height Adjustment (power)• Length Adjustment (fore/aft) (power)• Foldable Backrest• Lumbar Support adjustment (advanced)• Front Tilt adjustment (power)• Air Suspension (150 kg)• Fore/Aft Isolator (lockable)• Adjustable Shock Absorber• Autoshift controls (driver side)• Seat Cushion Extension Adjust

(power)• Shoulder Adjustment (power)• Memory Height Position (limiter)• Heated Cushions *Optional• Swivelling Base Seat *Optional• Side Support Adjustment Backrest• Memory General

Deluxe Seat

Deluxe Memory SettingsThe Isringhausen Deluxe Seat has a memorybutton that can be used to store settingson the seat. These functions are storedseparately. To operate the memory button:

• Adjust the seat• Choose desired memory 1, 2 or 3 by

turning button 1 to position 1, 2 or 3• Press and hold the middle of the button

till a beep is heard• The beep indicates the seat is

programmed to the desired setting

T8008882

Page 230: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Seats 223

Retrieving a Setting From the MemoryTo recall or retrieve a stored setting:

• Choose desired memory 1, 2 or 3 byturning to button 1 to position 1, 2 or 3.

• Press the middle of the button once• The seat returns to the stored position

Deluxe Seat Adjustments1 This knob controls the memory settings.2 Push the control button up or down OR

forward and backward to tilt the seator move the seat cushion forward andbackward.

3 Push the control button up or downOR forward and backward to movethe entire seat vertically and to moveforward and backward.

4 Heating and VentilationUse position 1 to maintain the rightclimate comfort and position 2 toquickly obtain the correct climatecomfort.

5 Upper section: incline the upper sectionof the backrest.Lower section: incline the entirebackrest.

6 Set the lumbar support and side support.7 Damping (Adjustable Shock Absorber).

W8003131

Page 231: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

224 Seats

National StandardSeat Adjustments1 Backrest tilt: By rotating the round

handle, the backrest recline angle canbe adjusted within 12 degrees.

2 Cushion front tilt and length: Pullingthe handle up and out adjusts the tiltand length of the seat cushion.

Note: Support body weight with yourfeet while adjusting.

3 Fore and aft movement: Press the leversideways to unlock the seat. Move seatfore or aft to a new position.

4 Ride height adjustment: Push the upperpart of the switch up to increase rideheight. Push the lower part of theswitch to deflate the airbag and lowerthe ride height.

5 Lumbar support adjustment: Push theupper part of the switch to inflate thesupport for a firmer support. Push thelower part of the switch to deflate thesupport.

6 Cushion rear tilt: Rotate the lever to getdifferent height positions.

Note: Support body weight with yourfeet while adjusting.

7 Chugger snubber: Moving the handledown isolates the seat from the fore andaft movement of the cab.

W8002743

National Standard Seat

W8002745

Page 232: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Seats 225

National Comfort SeatsSeat Adjustments8 Lumbar support adjustment: Push the

upper part of the switch to inflate thelower part of the 3–chamber support.Push the lower part to deflate it.

9 Lumbar support adjustment: Push theupper part of the switch to inflate themiddle part of the 3–chamber support.Push the lower part to deflate it.

10 Lumbar support adjustment: Push theupper part of the switch to inflate theupper part of the 3–chamber support.Push the lower part to deflate it.

11 Backrest side support: Push the upperpart of the switch to inflate the support.Push the lower part to deflate it.

12 Seat cushion side support: Push theupper part of the switch to inflate thesupport. Push the lower part to deflateit.

13 Front seat cushion adjustment: Pushthe switch up or down to choose heightposition.

14 Armrest angle adjustment: Ratchetingarmrest. Set to desired angle.

W8002742

National Comfort Seat

Page 233: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

226 Seats

National Bench Passenger SeatThe Bench Passenger seat has the option for a two-man storage seat. The base of the seat isa storage box that is accessed by lifting the seat cushion up.

W8003482

Page 234: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Seats 227

Passenger Seats

Isringhausen ToolBox Passenger SeatThe ToolBox passenger seat has an optional accessible or non-accessible ToolBox in thebase of the seat. If the toolbox is an option, the storage box is accessed by lifting the seatcushion up. NOTE: There is a release latch behind the seat.

W8003146

Page 235: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

228 Seats

Isringhausen StaticPassenger Seat (Tubular Frame)Static or Tubular Seat.

W8003148

No Passenger Seat (Optional)

DANGER

Using a temporary passenger seatingwithout the benefit of proper seatmounting and safety belt can, in the eventof a loss of control of the vehicle, causeserious personal injury or death.

In vehicles with no passenger seat installed,DO NOT let a passenger ride on temporaryseating. This is against the law and can bevery dangerous.

Page 236: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Cab Interior and Sleeper 229

Sleeper BunksGeneralUpper and lower bunks are available in theVN 780, 670 and 630 models. The lowerbunk is standard while the upper bunk isoptional. The VN 430 is equipped with onelower bunk.

Page 237: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

230 Cab Interior and Sleeper

VN 780 Sleeper Bunk1 Cushions: These can be moved and

placed to the side.2 Cushions.

The bunks for the VN 670, 630 and 430cover the luggage compartment. They arehinged for access to luggage from inside ofthe cab.

To gain access, release the latch mechanismand lift by the edge of the bunk platform.Gas springs aid in opening and closing theplatform in some models.

The upper bunks for the VN 780, 670 and630 may also be hinged (optional), and canbe raised out of the way. The VN 670 andVN 630 use the safety bunk harness latch tohold up the bunk. The VN 780 has latches onboth sides of the wall that hold the bunk inposition. To release the latches, pull the latchstrap in the middle of the bunk underside.

When the bunk is raised and latched, makesure that the latches on both sides closeand hold the bunk properly. For moreinformation on bunk safety restraints, seepage 76.

W8003159

Page 238: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Cab Interior and Sleeper 231

VN 780 Sleeper Upper Bunk

DANGER

Always have three limbs (one foot andtwo hands or two feet and one hand) incontact with the floor, bunk or step at alltimes when entering or exiting the upperbunk. Failure to follow this procedure canlead to a fall and cause severe personalinjury or death.

WARNING

Support the bunk with one hand whilereleasing the latches. Failure to supportthe bunk may lead to the bunk fallingwithout control, causing personal injury.

1 Upper bunk2 Upper bunk in lowered position3 Release/Pull strap4 Upper bunk in raised position

Page 239: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

232 Cab Interior and Sleeper

VN 670, 630 Sleeper Bunk

VN 670, 630 lower bunk.

W8003154

WARNING

Support the bunk with one hand whilereleasing the latches. Failure to supportthe bunk may lead to the bunk fallingwithout control, causing personalinjury.

VN 670, 630 lower and upper bunks.

W8003156

Page 240: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Cab Interior and Sleeper 233

VN 670 Optional fold down step.

In the VN 670 sleeper there is an option onthe passenger side which offers a fold downstep. See illustration.

W8003476

1 Fold down step2 Cabinet grab handle

VN 670

Moveable cushions in lower bunk.

W8003153

Page 241: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

234 Cab Interior and Sleeper

VN 430 Sleeper Bunk1 Bunk2 Bunk restraints3 Lower bunk restraint

attachment buckles4 Tenting buckles

W8003152

Page 242: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Cab Interior and Sleeper 235

Upper Bunk Access VN 780

DANGER

Always have three limbs (one foot andtwo hands or two feet and one hand) incontact with the floor, bunk or step at alltimes when entering or exiting the upperbunk. Failure to follow this procedure canlead to a fall and cause severe personalinjury or death.

WARNING

Support the ladder with one hand whilereleasing the lock straps. Failure tosupport the ladder may lead to the ladderfalling out, causing injury to leg or foot.

Access to the upper bunk is provided bylowering foldable ladder and securing theladder into the floor locator (6) and retainerbracket (2) in the upper bunk.

The ladder stored in its collapsed positionbehind the passenger side cabinet. To releasethe ladder, unsnap the lock straps. Supportthe ladder so it does not fall out unaided.

To access the upper bunk, start the climb bygrabbing the grab handles with both hands.Place the right foot on the bunk bottom tothe right of the cabinet and the left foot onthe upper step. Put both feet on the upperstep and move the right hand to the upperbunk for support. Swing the upper body intothe bunk and sit down.

The grab handle for upper bunk access islocated on the cabinet.

W8003151

1 Ladder in down position2 Retainer3 Grab handle4 Ladder (stored)5 Cabinet grab handle6 Ladder security positioning

Page 243: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

236 Cab Interior and Sleeper

Storage Compartments

DANGER

Heavy objects must be stored only in theoutside storage areas or secured on thefloor. Cabinets and storage compartmentsare designed for clothing and lighterpersonal effects only. In the event of acollision, heavy, unsecured objects inoverhead storage can come loose andcause severe personal injury or death tothe driver or passengers.

WARNING

All items within the cab must be securedbefore the vehicle is set in motion. Thisincludes, but is not limited to, drinks,clothes, books, televisions, etc. In theevent of a collision, loose items could flyaround inside the cab. This could causepersonal injury.

CAUTION

DO NOT overload the cab suspension.Make sure the weight distribution isequal in the cab. Total load for the cabsuspension in the daycab, VN 670, VN630 and VN 430 is 800 lb (360 kg), withdriver and passenger included. Totalload for the cab suspension in the VN780 is 1,000 lb. (455 kg), with driverand passenger included. Overloading thesuspension leads to poor ride and lowereddriving comfort.

Page 244: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Cab Interior and Sleeper 237

Front Overhead Storage

There are several combinations of the overhead storage compartments mounted over thewindshield. The compartments are split in the middle and they can be combined to cover thewhole width of the cab or just over the driver.The storage compartments have a maximum storage weight limit of approximately 18 lb (8kg) per section. That is, the limit covers each compartment section, either left or right side.

Option for CB storage

Option for CB storage

Page 245: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

238 Cab Interior and Sleeper

VN 780 StorageLoad limits:

W8003150

A: 6.6 lb. (3 kg)B: 6.6 lb. (3 kg)C: 8.8 lb. (4 kg)D: (with TV) 33.1 lb. (15 kg)D: (withoutTV)

13 lb. (6 kg)

E: Hang Rod(Standard)

19.8 lb. (9 kg)

F: (Standard) 39.6 lb. (18 kg)

G: 6.6 lb. (3 kg)H: 6.6 lb. (3 kg)I: 8.8 lb. (4 kg)J: (withmicrowave)

33.1 lb. (15 kg)

J: (withoutmicrowave)

13 lb. (6 kg)

K: 8.8 lb. (4 kg)L: 9.9 lb. (5 kg)M: 13.2 lb. (6 kg)N 13.2 lb. (6 kg)O: (withrefrigerator)

99 lb. (45 kg)

O: (withoutrefrigerator)

14 lb. (6.5 kg)

Page 246: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Cab Interior and Sleeper 239

VN 780 Bunk Storage1 Storage Bins2 Storage Compartment3 Storage Compartment4 Exterior Side Storage Compartment

W8003157

Page 247: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

240 Cab Interior and Sleeper

VN 670, 630, 430 Storage

1 Lower Bunk Floor Panel2 Release handle3 Restraint Cylinders4 Outside Storage Compartments

W8003155

Page 248: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Cab Interior and Sleeper 241

VN 780, VN 670 Office

DANGER

Do not sit at the table when the vehicle ismoving. It is intended for use only whenthe vehicle is parked. Passengers shouldbe in the passenger seat wearing thesafety belt or in the bunk with the bunkrestraint attached. Failure to follow theseinstructions may result in severe personalinjury or death in the event of a suddenstop or accident.

To raise table, remove the cushions from thebunk, place them to the sides. Release thelatch by pulling handle underneath the tabletop, as shown in illustration. Raise the tablelightly.

Line up the latch pegs with the holes in theback wall. See illustration.

Push the table firmly into the holes. Makesure the latches are caught properly bypulling out on the table. When the table isin place, put the cushions in place to form aseat and backrest.

To lower the table, remove the cushions andpull the handle underneath the tabletop torelease the latches. Lower the table to itsresting position. Place the seat cushionstoward the walls and then position thebackrest cushions as illustrated. Press downon the cushions in the middle to form amattress. See page 233.

W8003158

Page 249: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

242 Cab Interior and Sleeper

Interior Lights VN, VHDThe cab is equipped with separate andcombined interior and reading lights invarious locations in the cab. The front seatoverhead lights can be turned on at any timeusing the switch in the fixture. This is a threeway switch, pressing the lamp turns the lightON, OFF or the light comes on with the doorbeing opened. When the switch is in themiddle position, the light does not turn on,even when the door is opened.

WARNING

Using bulbs or lamps other than thosespecified may result in failures that couldoverheat and lead to a fire or a vehicleaccident caused by improper lighting.

Interior Lights VN, VHD

Chart Number Description

1 Overhead Dome Lamp

1 Overhead Dome/Spot Lamp connected to door

2 Door Courtesy Lamp

3 Dome Lamp -Sleeper

4 Reading Lamp under bunk storage

5 Reading Lamp

6 Overhead Fluorescent Lamp -Short

7 Overhead Fluorescent Lamp -Long

8 Overhead Dome/Spot Lamp

9 Control Panel Lamp

Note: For detailed bulb replacementinformation refer to your Maintenanceand Engine Manual. See the “ElectricalSystem Maintenance” section. To preventshort service life, DO NOT touch the glasssurface of the replacement bulb.

Page 250: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Cab Interior and Sleeper 243

Most of the vehicle interior lights areactivated by pressing on the lower end of thelamp. There are two external switches forthe interior lights, one located on the dashpanel, to the immediate left of the steeringcolumn, and the other is on the sleeper areacontrol panel.

The red courtesy light comes on when thedoor is opened. The lens is red to alertoncoming traffic from the rear that the dooris open. It is also used during night drivingto light up the floor area and steps withoutdistracting the driver with a glaring light.

CAUTION

DO NOT use sleeves of any kind overbulbs in the interior lamps. The bulbsmay over heat causing damage to thefixture including possible fire.

W3005323

The door latch has an internal switch thatoperates all door-activated lights.

W3005330

Page 251: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

244 Cab Interior and Sleeper

Sleeper Compartment SinkA built-in sink is available as optionalequipment for the VN 780 sleeper model.It is located on the left side, in the cabinetbehind the driver.

The sink is mounted in the drawer space. Topull out, grasp the drawer lip and release thelatch. Pull out until the faucet can be raisedwithout hitting the cabinet.

CAUTION

Never run the pump without water inthe freshwater tank. The pump may bedamaged if run dry.

W8003215

A: Increase flowB: Decrease flow

To operate the water pump there is acombined valve and switch in the knob (seearrow in illustration) on the base. Turn onthe 12 V switch on the sleeper switch panelto the left of the tower cabinet, then turn theknob slightly toward you to start the pump,see arrow in illustration. Turn the knobfurther to increase water flow. When theknob is turned fully back to rest position, thepump will stop.

CAUTION

Make sure the pump is turned off beforepushing the drawer in. If the pumpcontinues to deliver water, overflowingwater can flood the cab floor.

In the bottom of the sink there is a springloaded drain plug that is sealed by pressingdown and twisting clockwise. To release forletting water drain off, turn counterclockwiseand the spring will lift the plug and open thedrain.

Page 252: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Cab Interior and Sleeper 245

Fresh Water TankWater is drawn from the fresh water tank (1)located beside the waste water tank (2) in theleft hand side luggage compartment. Refillfresh water tank with potable drinking wateronly. Tank volume is 9 gallons (34 liters).On top of the tank is a hose (3) that servesas a filler and a vent tube. In the bottom ofthe tank is a drain valve (4), with a hoseattached, for draining the tank to the outside.

It is not recommended to keep unused waterin the tank for over one month. Clean andrefill as necessary.

W8002168

CAUTION

USE POTABLE DRINKING WATERONLY. Verify with the supplier of anywater prior to filling the fresh water tankthat it is potable to avoid contaminationof the tank. In the event that non-potableor contaminated water enters the freshwater tank, it should be drained and thetank should be cleaned out with a goodcommercial cleaner/disinfectant. Thetank should also be tested for purity priorto being used for drinking. It may benecessary to replace the tank if it cannotbe cleaned properly.

CAUTION

Fresh water and waste water tanks mustbe drained if the vehicle is not being usedand the outside temperature is belowfreezing. Also drain the hose from thepump to the faucet. Failure to drain thesystem may result in component damagedue to water forming ice.

Page 253: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

246 Cab Interior and Sleeper

To fill the fresh water tank, unscrew the fillhose from the elbow fitting and remove thefill cap (5) from the tank. The fill hose isconnected to a hose with a garden hose-typefitting. Before turning the water on, turn thevalve handle (6) to close the valve (see lowerillustration). When the end of the fill hoseis inserted in the water reservoir, open thevalve slowly to fill. The valve is fully openwhen the handle is parallel with the hose. W8002167

When the tank is full, reinstall the fill hoseon the elbow fitting. Do not tighten morethan finger tight. Make sure that the valvehandle is fully open (1) to allow venting. Ifthe valve is left in any of the closed positions(2), the pumped out water may generate anunder-pressure in the tank, interfering withthe pump operation.

Note: The valve positions are shown asviewed from inside the cab.

W8002169

Page 254: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Cab Interior and Sleeper 247

Waste Water TankWhen the water is drained from the sink, itis collected in a waste water tank behind thefresh water tank. Waste water tank volumeis 5 gallons (19 liters). The tank is fastenedto the floor with a strap that can be easilyopened for tank removal.

Before removing the waste water tank,loosen the strap around the tank and unscrewthe drain hose from the inlet cap. Carry thetank to an approved dump station and emptyby removing the inlet cap and tilting the tankup to let the waste water drain.

Flush the tank with fresh water. Replacethe inlet cap, strap the tank into the cab andattach the drain hose.

W8002170

Page 255: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

248 Cab Interior and Sleeper

Miscellaneous Cab Equipment

Cup Holders and Trash CompartmentThere is a cup holder at the lower part of the dash. To open, press the top part of the lid inand the lid will fold out. To close, press the lid in until the latch closes. There are also twodash-mounted cup holders convenient for the driver and passenger.

Trash bin: (Removable), Located below thecigar lighter and 12 V power outlet.

W8003207

Sleeper cup holder:

Located on the left lower tower cabinet, forthe bottom bunk. There is another cup holderlocated on the left upper tower cabinet forthe upper bunk.

W8003181

Page 256: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Cab Interior and Sleeper 249

CurtainsCurtains are available for all the sleeper cabs to ensure privacy and to darken the cabin fromoutside light. Various configurations are available. Curtains can cover the whole windshieldarea or go across the sleeper opening.When the curtains are not in use, they are stored out of the way and held in place withvelcro straps.

W8003141

1 Curtains, windshield2 Curtains, sleeper3 Top sleeper cover4 Sky light cover

Covers for the VN 670 are to be stored in arolled-up position in the opening behind thecabinet.

The covers for the VN 780 side windowsare stored behind the backrest cushions. Allcovers are put on with snap buttons thatare on the cover and window rim, with theexception of the sky light cover.

Page 257: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

250 Cab Interior and Sleeper

Smoke Detector, VN (Optional)Temporarily Switching off The Smoke DetectorPress the button or dash switch once.

The smoke detector is switched off for tenminutes. Use this function when smoking orwhen driving in a dusty environment. Thesmoke detector can be switched off when itis silent and when it is sounding an alarm.When the smoke detector is switched off,the light flashes every ten seconds. After tenminutes the smoke detector becomes activeagain.

Battery for the Smoke DetectorWhen the battery is about to run out, ashort signal will sound every 45 seconds.Replacing the battery.

Test the detector at least once every month(battery check) and always after holidays orother long periods of absence.

Check the battery by holding the button for5 – 10 seconds. If the battery is OK, analarm will sound for as long as the buttonis depressed. When the battery is beingchecked, the detector is switched of for tenminutes.

The detector should be handed in forinspection every 5 years, please contact yourauthorized Volvo dealer.

T0008961

W3005427

Note: When the battery is being checked,the detector is switched off for ten minutes.

Page 258: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Communication and Entertainment 251

AntennasGeneral1 Multiband2 Multiplexer (Rami)3 Radio AM/FM4 TV Antenna

Multiband AntennaThere are antennas mounted on the top ofthe mirror brackets for wideband reception.They receive or send signals for radio, CBand telephone. Each antenna carries multiplewire windings that work together with mirrorbracket devices to cover the needs of manyuses.

If the antenna is damaged, replace it onlywith a multiband type antenna. A regularantenna does not have the wiring necessaryto give good reception for all uses.

W3005287

Page 259: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

252 Communication and Entertainment

Antenna Multiplexer

W3005509

1 Cellular Phone Antenna Cable2 Radio Antenna Cable Connection3 Phone Cable Connection4 CB Radio Antenna Cable Connection5 Antenna Connection, Right Mirror6 Antenna Connection, Left Mirror

Page 260: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Communication and Entertainment 253

Communications signals that travel to andfrom the antennas go through the antennamultiplexer. It is standard in the VN670 and VN 780, and optional on othermodels. Coaxial cables for the cellularphone, CB radio and radio are includedin the multiplexer system — all using thesame set of antennas.The multiplexer is accessed through thelower dash panels. Cable routing is asshown in the illustration above. Use onlygenuine Volvo replacement parts for thismultiplexer system; standard antennaswill give unsatisfactory performance.The windings in the antennas are specificto this system: different sections of theantenna are used for the cellular phone,radio and CB.

Note: The location of the CB may vary.CB connections can be located either in thedash or overhead storage area, dependingon vehicle options. See “Front OverheadStorage” page 237.

Page 261: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

254 Communication and Entertainment

Stereo/RadioStereoThe radio is mounted in the right hand sideof the dash. Several models are available,from a basic unit to top of the line. In theVN 780, there is also a CD-changer availablewhich is controlled from the unit in the dash.

Depending on the model, there are someimportant features built into the unit. Takethe time to read the manufacturer’s manualto be able to operate functions such asradio wake-up alarm, snooze function andtheft-deterrent coding.

CD-ChangerA CD-changer is available for VN 670 andVN 780. It is located in the passenger sideoverhead storage. The power amp is locatedin the same storage. There can be 4 to 9speakers in the cab. The subwoofer is locatedin the lower bunk support.

Read the manufacturer’s manual foroperational information.

Page 262: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Communication and Entertainment 255

Television

WARNING

All items within the cab must be securedbefore the vehicle is set in motion. Thisincludes, but is not limited to, drinks,clothes, books, televisions, etc. In theevent of a sudden stop or collision, looseitems could fly around inside the cab.This could cause personal injury.

The VN 780, VN 670 and VN 630 arealready equipped for TV with a pre-installedantenna. The TV should be installed inthe passenger side cabinet where there is astandard 12 V connection or an optional 120V connection.

To prevent the TV set from moving when thevehicle is driven, the strap in the TV storagearea should be clamped tight around the set.

If the strap comes loose from the buckle,thread it as illustrated. Adjust the strap soit is tight around the set and then clamp thebuckle down to lock it in place. The strapis wound around the TV as a loop, throughthe hold-down brackets. Locate the bucklewhere it can be reached most easily.

W3005324

There is an optional television speakeravailable, located in the top of the sleeperswitch panel. Beside the speaker, there is ajack for headphones. This is provided forsilent viewing of the TV. When the headsetjack is plugged in, the speaker is cut out.

Page 263: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

256 Communication and Entertainment

TV AntennaThe TV antenna for the VN 780, is standardequipment.

The VN 670 and VN 630 antenna isaccessible in the cabinet.

CAUTION

DO NOT pierce or drill through theheadliner. The TV antenna may bedamaged.

Page 264: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Communication and Entertainment 257

Communication EquipmentCB RadioThere is an optional platform provided for aCB radio on top of the dash. The unit is heldin place with a strap which can accommodatea variety of sizes. For electrical hook-up, seepage 327.

The CB Radio can be permanently mounteddirectly below the radio. When the optionalswitch panel is removed, a DIN standardradio mount is available.

The CB radio can also be mounted in theoverhead storage. See “Front OverheadStorage” page 237.

W3005499

TelephoneThere is room on the dash for a mobiletelephone. This can be hooked up to themultiplex box.

If the vehicle is delivered with a multiplexbox, the connecting end of the telephonecoaxial cable should be located at the lowerdash cover.

Road RelayThe Road Relay is an engine communicationtool that allows the driver to have fuelconsumption, time and mileage readoutsand also programmed reminders for serviceintervals. The Road Relay should bepermanently mounted directly below theradio.

Collected data can be downloaded for use ina stationary computer where the data can becollected and compared over time.

Page 265: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

258 Fuel Economy Driving

Fuel EconomyGeneralThe absolute fuel consumption (countedin miles per US gallon or liters per 100kilometers) is determined by a large numberof circumstances which can be related to oneof the following main areas:

1 Build specification and equipment

2 Service and maintenance

3 External environment

4 Driving habits

Due to these factors, fuel consumptioncan vary considerably within what iscalled “normal fuel consumption.” Fuelconsumption can vary from over 10 mpg (24L/100 km) when driving empty on a niceand dry summer road to 3.5 mpg (67 L/100km) while driving with maximum permittedGVW, with vehicle and trailer, on a hilly andslushy winter road.

Build Specification and EquipmentWhenever a vehicle is used for transportation,its build specification, equipment and grossvehicle weight have a decisive effect onboth fuel consumption and performance.The factors which have the greatestinfluence on fuel consumption are primarily:driveline combination, height of trailer orsuperstructure, use of air fairings, tire type,number of wheels, gross vehicle weight, andaccessories.

Page 266: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Fuel Economy Driving 259

Driveline CombinationEngine, transmission and final drive must beselected in such a way that the engine canoperate within the economic speed range atnormal driving speed. This range is definedas where the engine makes the best use ofthe energy content of the diesel fuel.

A poorly selected rear axle ratio, whichresults in the engine speed being constantlyabove the optimum speed, will increase fuelconsumption.

TiresHeavy duty threaded tires increase rollingresistance considerably. For long haul,choose a smoother, ribbed type tire. Choosea lugged type tire only when the addedtraction in mud and snow is needed.

The number of wheels (axles) has a directeffect on the rolling resistance and, thereby,the fuel consumption. For volume and/or lowweight transports, the use of a 4X2 insteadof a 6X4 should be considered.

Gross Vehicle WeightThe gross vehicle weight of a vehiclecombination has a large impact on the rollingresistance.

AccessoriesAs a rule, accessories such as roof rack,advertising signs, bug screens, exposed airhorns, etc., have a negative effect on fuelconsumption.

Page 267: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

260 Fuel Economy Driving

Service and MaintenanceA modern heavy-duty vehicle requiresregular and preventive maintenance to ensurethat all its components function as theyshould. Use the recommended preventivemaintenance (PM) program that VolvoTrucks North America, Inc. has developedfor the vehicles. This ensures optimal energyefficiency from all components that areimportant to fuel consumption.

TiresIf the tire pressure is too low, the rollingresistance increases and, thereby, increasesthe fuel consumption. The overall economyis also affected as tire wear increasesconsiderably.

BrakesDragging brakes increase fuel consumption.They should be checked regularly. It isimportant that the release action of the airvalves is fast and that the moving partsof the wheel brakes are checked for goodadjustment and operation.

Page 268: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Fuel Economy Driving 261

AxlesAn axle out of alignment increases rollingresistance. Regularly check the front wheelalignment and axles on both the tractor andtrailer/semi-trailer. If they are correct, therewill be less rolling resistance and, therefore,lower fuel consumption.

A good sign of an axle or wheel out ofalignment is uneven tire wear. Check thetires often.

EngineFaulty or incorrectly adjusted enginecomponents increase fuel consumption. Thelist below gives some typical componentsthat can influence fuel consumption:

• Blocked (on the outside) charge aircooler/radiator package

• Faulty thermostat• Blocked fuel filters• Blocked air intake filter• Faulty injectors• Dirty turbocharger• Air in fuel system• Faulty fuel supply pump• Faulty fuel relief valve• Faulty fan thermostat/clutch

Page 269: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

262 Fuel Economy Driving

External EnvironmentUnder unfavorable conditions, the externalenvironment can have a negative effect onfuel consumption. This can be broken downinto two main groups: weather and wind;and the nature of the roads. Rain, snow,icy conditions and headwinds have a largenegative impact on fuel economy, as do hillyroads and uneven road surfaces.

HeadwindsHeadwinds have a large negative impacton fuel consumption. With tailwinds, fuelsaving is only marginal.

Air TemperatureLow ambient temperature contributes toincreased fuel consumption.

Rain, Snow and Road SurfaceA wet road surface increases rollingresistance and, thereby, fuel consumption.Slush will increase consumption even more.In certain cases, the surface structure of theroad can also have a negative effect on fuelconsumption.

GradientsA hilly road with many bends demandsa higher output from the engine. Thedifference between flat, straight roads andhilly, winding roads can amount to as muchas a 50 percent increase in fuel consumption.

When choosing your route, avoid hills, roughroads and frequent stops.

Page 270: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Fuel Economy Driving 263

Driving HabitsThe way in which a vehicle is being drivenis the one factor which has the greatestinfluence on fuel consumption. Correctdriving saves fuel and reduces vehicle wear.To achieve optimal running economy, thedriver should always remember to:

• Start the engine correctly (especiallyimportant in winter season)

• Maintain an even and correct speed• Keep the engine at its optimum speed

range• Use the correct uphill and downhill

driving technique.

Starting the EngineStart the engine according to the instructionsin the Operator’s Manual of the enginemanufacturer (for a Volvo engine, see page266). A proper start, especially during thecold season, saves fuel and reduces enginewear.

Sluggish lube oil in the engine makes coldstarting more difficult. Therefore, it isimportant to always use engine oil with thecorrect viscosity. (For the sake of the overallfuel economy, it is also important to have theright viscosity of transmission and rear axleoils).

Page 271: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

264 Fuel Economy Driving

Avoid High Engine SpeedsHigh engine speeds mean high fuelconsumption. “Jerky” driving also increasesfuel consumption when the vehicle isconstantly accelerated and slowed down.Avoid a higher consumption by steady, evendriving.

Refer to each engine manufacturer’soperator’s manual for information on theengine’s optimum operating range.

Hill Driving TechniqueUse the inertia of the vehicle to go overthe crest of a hill under reduced power.Use gravity to help with acceleration whengoing down the hill. Build up speed beforereaching the next uphill.

High SpeedWith increasing speed comes an increasingwind resistance that negatively affects fuelconsumption.

Page 272: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Engine Start and Operation 265

Starting the EngineStart ProcedureNote: For cold weather starting, see page270.

These starting and operating proceduresshould be followed for all engines. Formore detailed information about designand function on a non-Volvo engine, readthe Operator’s Manual from the enginemanufacturer.

Note: Before starting the engine, see“Instruments and Controls” (starting on page96) for detailed information on how thegauges and telltales work.

DANGER

DO NOT use ether or similar startingaids in a Volvo or any other engine with apreheater. The Volvo engine is equippedwith a preheater. Introduction of ether orother combustible material in the intakemanifold could cause a fire or explosion,personal injury or death.

DANGER

Never operate the starter without firstplacing the transmission in neutral ordepressing the clutch pedal. Failure tofollow these instructions may result in theunintentional movement of the vehicleresulting in property damage, personalinjury or death.

W0001484

Page 273: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

266 Engine Start and Operation

1 Before starting the engine, performthe engine pre-trip inspection anddaily maintenance checks in “Pre-TripInspection and Daily Maintenance”starting on page 55.

2 Make sure the parking brakes areengaged.

3 Place the transmission in neutral ordepress the clutch pedal.

4

CAUTION

DO NOT crank the engine for morethan 30 seconds at a time; wait twominutes after each try to allow thestarter to cool. Failure to followthese instructions could cause starterdamage.

Note: Some starters are equipped withan optional thermostat. If overcrankingoccurs, the thermostat breaks theelectrical circuit to the starter motoruntil the motor has cooled.

Turn on the ignition with theswitch key (see page 269 for ignitionswitch information). Some telltales willcome on in a routine check that showsthe bulbs and systems are OK.If any of the telltales stay lit, thatfunction of the vehicle may not beoperable. DO NOT operate the vehicleuntil the problem is repaired.

Page 274: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Engine Start and Operation 267

5 Turn the key to the start position.Release key as soon as the enginehas started. For the Volvo engine,the preheater can be engaged to helpstarting in cold temperatures. Forswitch function, see page 269.

6

CAUTION

If at start-up, or thereafter, the oilpressure gauge indicates any drop inoil pressure, the engine must be shutdown immediately. Failure to stopthe engine may cause major enginedamage.

When the engine has started,it takes a while to send lubricating oilto all bearings and shafts, and betweenpistons and liners. Wait for the oilpressure gauge to settle at a normallevel, then bring engine speed upgradually. Increase speed as it warmsup. Check all gauges during warm-up.

7 During warm-up, apply load graduallyuntil the oil temperature reaches140 F (60 C). To start a loadedvehicle, the minimum coolanttemperature must be approximately 120

F (50 C).

Page 275: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

268 Engine Start and Operation

Stopping the EngineAllow the engine to slow down and idlefor 3 to 5 minutes before shutting it off.This allows the turbo to slow down and thecooling system to dissipate the engine heat.Switch the engine off by turning the ignitionkey to the O, or OFF, position.

CAUTION

Shutting off an engine immediately afterhigh speed or full load operation candamage the turbo and cause heat stress inthe engine. Always let the engine idle for3 to 5 minutes before shutting it off.

Page 276: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Engine Start and Operation 269

Ignition SwitchThe ignition switch is located on the rightside of the steering column just under thesteering wheel. Standard equipment is anormal ignition switch.

A steering wheel lock is available as anoption. When the key is removed it actuatesa detente pin that prevents the steering shaftfrom turning.

Note: The vehicle is delivered with 2identical keys. If more keys are needed,order them through your authorized VolvoTruck dealer. The keys are laser cut andrequire a special machine for copying,available through your authorized VolvoTruck dealer. Record the key code andkeep in a secure place. A new key can bemade, using the key code, if the keys arelost.

The ignition positions are:

O Off

I Radio, Accessories

II Drive

II 1/2 Preheat (Volvo engine only)

III Start

The ignition switch has a restart inhibitorlocking out the start position after one try,which means that the key must be turnedback to O before a new attempt at startingcan be made.

The key can only be removed when in the Oor Off position.

For full starting instructions, see page 266.

W3001302

Page 277: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

270 Engine Start and Operation

Cold Weather Start and OperationVolvo Engine Cold StartNote: These cold start instructions are forVolvo engines only. For other engine makes,see the manufacturer’s handbook.

DANGER

DO NOT use ether or similar startingaids in a Volvo or any other engine withstart help. The Volvo engine is equippedwith a preheater. Introduction of ether orother combustible material in the intakemanifold could cause a fire or explosion,resulting in severe property damage,severe personal injury or death.

Note: Volvo engines have a unique coldstart feature. Depending on the ambienttemperature, the engine cranks two to fourturns without injecting fuel. This providescleaner combustion at start-up and promoteslonger engine life.

To avoid excessive exhaust smoke whenstarting a cold engine, the intake air shouldbe warmed up by using the preheater.

Turn the ignition key to the preheat positionand hold momentarily to engage thepreheater. It remains engaged and will lightthe preheater telltale between 0 and 50seconds, depending on the engine coolanttemperature.

T3008841

Page 278: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Engine Start and Operation 271

CoolantTemperature

PreheaterEngage-

mentTime (sec-

onds)

Above +54 F (12 C) 0

Below +54 F (+12 C) to+14 F (-10 C)

25 to 50

Below +14 F (-10 C) 50

When the engine has started, the heater willautomatically be reengaged for the sametime length as the preheater.

The preheater will always be engaged whenthe key is set in preheat position, independentof coolant.

Engines Without Preheater

Engines not equipped may, dependingon coolant temperature, take longer tostart. If this should happen, DO NOTrelease the ignition key until the engine hasstarted (while still observing the 30 secondmaximum cranking time).

Page 279: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

272 Engine Start and Operation

Ether Start

DANGER

DO NOT use ether or similar startingaids in a Volvo or any other engine with apreheater. The Volvo engine is equippedwith a preheater. Introduction of ether orother combustible material in the intakemanifold could cause a fire or explosion,personal injury or death.

DANGER

DO NOT breathe the ether fumes.Breathing ether fumes could result inpersonal injury or death.

DANGER

If using a cold start system, make sureto read and follow the manufacturer’sinstructions regarding its use, handlingand storage. Many starting fluids are soldin capsules or pressure cans and improperusage can be dangerous, resulting inpersonal injury or death.

Ether allows combustion with lower cylindertemperatures. A hand-held spray can forinjecting ether through the engine air intakesystem will usually provide quick startingto as low as -10 F (-23 C). Below thistemperature, a permanently installed systemfor injecting a combustible vapor directlyinto the intake manifold is necessary.

Only inject ether vapors when the engine iscranking. Use it sparingly! Excessive etheruse can cause piston and ring damage.

W0001484

Page 280: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Engine Start and Operation 273

Cold Weather OperationIf the engine is in good mechanical conditionand the necessary preparations are takenfor cold weather operation, ordinary coldweather will not cause difficulty in startingor loss of efficiency.

Cold weather operation does requirechanges in operating practices, maintenanceprocedures, lubrication and fuel. Additionsto the vehicle, such as heated fuel filters, fueltank heater, engine block heater, winterfront,etc. can make winter operation easier.Contact your authorized Volvo Truck dealerfor the correct accessories and informationabout installation.

If satisfactory engine temperature is notmaintained, increased engine wear will resultin higher maintenance cost. Accessoriesshould be designed to be easily disconnectedwhen switching to driving in warmer weatherso they do not affect the operation of theengine.

For cold weather operation follow theserecommendations:

• When starting the engine intemperatures below 5 F (–15 C), useengine lubricants of lower viscosity. Seethe “Operator’s Manual, Maintenanceand Engine” for more information.

• When the temperature is belowfreezing, make sure the concentrationof antifreeze in the coolant is sufficientto prevent freezing. Refer to the“Operator’s Manual, Maintenance andEngine” for more information.

Page 281: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

274 Engine Start and Operation

• During cold weather, pay more attentionto the condition of the batteries. Testthem frequently to ensure sufficientpower for starting. A dead battery mayfreeze.

• Fuel cloud point is the temperature atwhich wax crystals become visible,which is generally above the pourpoint of the fuel. To keep the fuelfilter elements from plugging withwax crystals, the cloud point shouldbe no higher than the lowest ambienttemperature at which the engine muststart.

To prevent wear and possible damage to theengine when it is cold, gradually bring it upto operating temperature before operatingat high engine speeds or full load. Afterstarting and before moving the vehicle,run the engine at 800 to 1000 rpm for 3 to5 minutes. Operate at partial engine loaduntil the coolant temperature reaches 165 F(75 C).

Engine Block Heater (Optional)An electric engine block heater can beinstalled for keeping the coolant hot whenthe vehicle is parked. The heater is mountedthrough the side of the engine block with theheater coils in the coolant jacket. The heaterdoes not interfere with normal operation andcan be permanently installed.

The heater runs on 120 V and has an easilyaccessible plug, located beside the driverside door. The plug will hook up to a normalextension cable.

W3005284

Page 282: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Engine Start and Operation 275

Oil Pan Heater (optional)Oil pan heaters aid low temperature startingby improving oil flow to critical parts inthe engine. This helps prevent engine wear.They are similar to block heaters and arewired into the same plug as the enginecoolant heater.

Fuel Heater Filter (Optional)If running in very cold weather, a heatedfuel filter should be added. A number ofdifferent fuel heaters are available as options.They are electrically heated and regulatedby a thermostat or coolant heated. They aretypically built into the primary fuel filterhousing.

W2003931

Fuel Tank Heater (Optional)An in-tank fuel heater is also available.In-tank heaters use hot engine coolantto warm the fuel. This prevents waxformation in the fuel during cold seasonoperation. These heaters are thermostaticallycontrolled and will automatically raise thefuel temperature to an optimum level.

Page 283: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

276 Engine Start and Operation

WinterfrontVolvo Trucks North America, Inc. doesnot recommend the use of winterfronts,shutters or any other shield in front of thegrille or radiator package under normalcircumstances.

Today’s electronically controlled enginesare designed to operate in cold temperatureswithout a winterfront. These devices, ifnot used properly, can cause higher exhausttemperatures, power loss, excessive fanusage, failure of the charge-air-cooler and areduction in fuel economy.

Winterfronts are properly used in thewintertime during very cold weather withsustained temperatures below -15 F(-25 C). In these cases, coolant and inletmanifold temperatures must also be carefullymonitored and controlled.

CAUTION

Failure to remove the winterfront whentemperatures go above -15 F (-25 C)could cause severe damage to engine,charge-air-cooler and/or loss of fueleconomy.

If a winterfront is used, it must conform tothese specifications:

• The grille coverage should be such thatairflow through to the charge-air-cooleris at a uniform rate over the entire area.This means that a single, small openingin the winterfront is not acceptable.

• Air passage must be distributed evenlyacross the grille and no more than 85%can be covered.

Please see your authorized Volvo Truckdealer for Volvo recommended winterfronts.

Note: If there is engine or related damagethat can be traced to an improperly usedwinterfront, the warranty is no longer validfor those parts.

Page 284: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Engine Start and Operation 277

Engine OperationGeneralProper operation, driving techniques andmaintenance are key factors in obtainingthe maximum life and economy from amodern turbocharged diesel engine. Thissection has operational information aboutthe components that make up the engine.For the best operation economy, see “FuelEconomy” page 258.

When changing gears, avoid lugging toextend engine life. When the engine isoperating at full throttle and maximumgoverned speed cannot be reached ormaintained, the engine is lugging. Whenapproaching a hill requiring more power, itis necessary to downshift the transmission asthe vehicle goes into the grade. Acceleratingto the governed engine speed will giveadditional power at approximately the sameroad speed. For shifting instructions, seethe transmission manufacturer’s Operator’sManual.

Always start moving the load in a gear lowenough so that the engine can be acceleratedto the governed speed. Then shift to the nextgear as the engine decelerates. For loadedvehicles, do not skip a gear or lug the enginewhile getting up to cruising speed. For emptyor light loads, it is permissible to skip gears.

When operating on a level highway or atcruising speed, hold the engine speed atapproximately 1400 to 1600 rpm for largedisplacement engines to achieve power andeconomical fuel consumption.

Page 285: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

278 Engine Start and Operation

The operator should understand the operatingcharacteristics of the engine the vehicle isequipped with. Modern diesel engines havemaximum torques at much lower enginespeeds than in the past. As such, theseengines are designed to perform satisfactorilyat a lower speed. New transmissions withwide ratio steps between gears demand theuse of these engines.

Excessive exhaust smoke may be due to thetype of fuel used, a restricted air cleaner, amalfunctioning fuel system or the way thevehicle is operated. Shift gears and increaseor decrease the engine speed as necessary toobtain the engine speed/transmission gearcombination which will prevent smoking.Excessive smoke indicates wasted fuel whichcreates carbon deposits in the engine andturbocharger. This causes excessive enginewear and oil consumption. Excessive smokenot only pollutes the atmosphere but can alsocause shortened exhaust system life.

Engine Break-InEngines used in the VN and VHD series arerun on dynamometers before being shippedfrom the manufacturer. In most applications,the engine can be put to work immediately,but the operator should be extra observantof the operating conditions shown on thegauges during the initial 100 hours or 3,000miles (5,000 km).

A more frequent check of the enginecompartment for fluid leaks, fluid levelsand fastener tightness is also recommendedduring the initial period.

Page 286: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Engine Start and Operation 279

Engine Shut-Down System

DANGER

Failure to take the necessary precautionswhen the CHECK or STOP telltales areon, can ultimately result in automaticengine shut-down and the loss of powersteering. Vehicle crash can occur.

The engine shut-down system willautomatically derate or stop the engine whenone or more of the systems listed belowreaches a critical stage:

• High Coolant Temperature

• Low Oil Pressure

• Low Coolant Level

Derate and shut-down functions may beapplied differently, or added to, dependingon the engine manufacturer. See the engineoperator’s manual for more information.

When the shut-down is activated, the telltalescome on and the buzzer is also activated.From that time it will take 30 seconds beforethe engine shuts down. In this time period,find a safe place to pull off of the road.

After the engine has been shut down by thesystem, the override will allow a restart ofthe engine for 30 seconds. This is so thatthe vehicle may be pulled off the road, ifnecessary. The alarm will remain activateduntil repairs have been made to correct theproblem.

The operator should not continually overridethe system as this can cause serious damageto the vehicle’s engine.

W3005170

W3005171

Page 287: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

280 Engine Start and Operation

Engine OverspeedThis vehicle is equipped with a diesel engineand should not be operated in an area witha concentration of hydrocarbon vapors (forexample gasoline or diesel fuel fumes). Beespecially cautious of low-lying or closed-inareas. The vapors may be drawn into theengine through the air intake and cause theengine to overspeed. Hot carbon and othersparks may come from the exhaust system,and cause an explosion and fire.

If the vehicle is in an area where hydrocarbonvapors may be present, shut the engineoff immediately if any abnormalities areexperienced. DO NOT leave it unattended.

DANGER

The diesel engine will operate on any fuelwhich enters the cylinder, whether it isfrom the injectors or from the air intakesystem. Therefore, if any solvent is usedto flush out the air cleaner element, theengine may overspeed during start-up.Engine damage and severe injury and/ordeath from burns or explosion can occur.

DANGER

DO NOT use ether or similar startingaids in a Volvo or any other engine with apreheater. The Volvo engine is equippedwith a preheater. Introduction of ether orother combustible material in the intakemanifold could cause a fire or explosion,personal injury or death.

W0001484

Page 288: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Engine Start and Operation 281

IdlingAll VN and VHD model engines areelectronically governed engines. Theidle speed is pre-programmed from themanufacturer. Low idle speed is adjustablewithin certain limits (for most enginesbetween 600 to 750 rpm). See page 282 formore information.

The common belief that idling a dieselengine causes no engine damage is wrong.Idling produces sulfuric acid, which breaksdown the oil and eats into bearings, rings,valve stems and engine surfaces.

Note: Avoid excessive idling. If the vehicleis parked for more than 5 minutes, stop theengine. An engine can burn from 0.75 to 1.5gallons (3 to 5.5 liters) of fuel per hour whileidling. During long engine idling periods, theengine coolant temperature may fall belowthe normal operating range*. Incompletecombustion of fuel during the warm-upperiod can cause dilution of the oil in thecrankcase, formation of lacquer or gummydeposits on the valves, pistons and rings, andrapid accumulation of sludge in the engine.

*Volvo engines are equipped with a warmholding device (EPG = Exhaust PressureGovernor) to keep engine to normaloperating temperature to prevent incompletecombustion, even at idle.

Page 289: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

282 Engine Start and Operation

Low Idle AdjustmentIf the engine coolant temperature is above122 F (50 C), the vehicle is stationary(engine running; accelerator released;parking brake on) and the PTO not engaged,the engine low idle speed can be adjustedwith the use of the cruise control function.

1 Set the cruise control switch to the ONposition.

2 Depress the foot brake pedal. Hold itdown during the entire procedure.

3 Move the cruise control switch to theRESUME position and hold it there forfour seconds. Release the switch. Theengine speed will drop to the defaultlow idle.

4 The idle speed is adjusted up with theSET+ switch. Each time the SET+switch is pressed momentarily, idlespeed will increase approx. 10 rpm(the speed cannot be increased abovethe maximum allowed by the enginemanufacturer).

5 The idle speed is adjusted down withthe SET- switch. Each time the SET-switch is pressed momentarily, theidle speed will decrease approx. 10rpm. (the speed cannot be adjustedbelow the low idle set by the enginemanufacturer). By continuouslypressing the switch, engine speed willramp up (SET+) or down (SET-).

6 When the desired engine idle speed isreached, push and hold the SET andmove the cruise control switch to theRESUME position at the same time andhold them in position for four seconds.Release the switches.

7 Release the brake pedal to set the newidle speed. If an error was made duringthe adjustment procedure, the defaultidle speed will be maintained.

W3002499

DANGER

Before setting the idle, apply the parkingbrakes and place the transmission inneutral. Failure to do so can result inunexpected vehicle movement and cancause serious personal injury or death.

Page 290: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Engine Start and Operation 283

Idle Shutdown TimerThe idle shutdown timer can be programmedto shut the engine down after a specificengine idling time. This programmingcannot be changed by the operator can bedone using special tools. Contact yourauthorized Volvo Truck dealer for details.

The permitted idle time can be set to thefollowing time intervals:

Volvo 1 to 40 minutes

Cummins 1 to 100 minutes

When the idle shutdown feature is enabledthe engine will shut down at the set timeunder the following conditions:

• Vehicle speed is 0.

• Engine is running at idle speed.

• Coolant temperature is above113 F (45 C).

• Parking brake is applied.

These are standard choices when the vehicleis delivered. For more information aboutother customer adaptation choices, contactyour authorized Volvo Truck dealer.

Page 291: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

284 Engine Start and Operation

Uphill OperationFor best performance, allow engine speed toreach the bottom of the rated torque rangebefore downshifting. Continue to downshiftin this manner until a gear is reached thatwill maintain the desired speed. Continue tooperate at the rated torque if the vehicle willmake it to the top without a downshift. Beginupshifting as the grade of the hill decreasesand the engine begins to accelerate above1600 rpm. Driving this way will give thebest fuel economy and performance.

Note: Allowing the engine to lug downto the end of maximum torque range ispermissible if the vehicle is cresting the topof a hill. However, extended operation atengine speeds below the maximum torquerange (usually 1000 to 1200 rpm) will raiseexhaust temperature and cylinder pressure.This can lead to reduced engine life.

Downhill Operation

CAUTION

DO NOT exceed engine manufacturer’srecommended maximum engine speed.Engine damage can occur. If equippedwith an engine or exhaust brake, DO NOTexceed 2300 rpm.

On a downgrade, do not coast with theclutch pedal depressed or the transmissionin neutral. Select a gear that does notallow the engine speed to exceed the enginemanufacturer’s maximum engine speedrecommendation. Use the engine or exhaustbrake and/or the service brakes to control thevehicle speed. A simple rule is to select thesame gear used to go up the grade.

Page 292: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Engine Start and Operation 285

High Altitude OperationEngines lose power when operated at highaltitude because the air is too thin to allowburning as much fuel as at sea level. Fornaturally aspirated engines, this loss is about3 percent per 1000 feet (300 m) increase inaltitude above sea level. Most turbochargedengines are rated for higher altitudes andwill not lose as much power as a naturallyaspirated engine.

An engine will produce excessive exhaustsmoke at high altitude unless a lower gearis used. Shift gears as needed to avoidexcessive exhaust smoke.

Closely monitor the gauges during highaltitude operation. The thinner ambient airreduces the efficiency of the engine coolingsystem. Engine overheat or cylinder damagecould occur if the engine is operated at fullload for extended periods at high altitudes inhot weather. Downshift and reduce vehiclespeed to reduce engine load when driving onlong grades in these conditions. This willhelp keep engine air intake manifold andcoolant temperatures within safe limits.

Page 293: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

286 Engine Start and Operation

Cruise Control

DANGER

DO NOT use the cruise control in heavytraffic, with ice/snow on the road orduring other unfavorable conditions. Thismay lead to a loss of vehicle control,causing a vehicle crash, personal injuryor death.

EngagingThe cruise control switches are located onthe turn signal lever.

To engage and set desired speed:

1 Set the cruise control switch to ON.

2 When the desired vehicle speed hasbeen reached, momentarily press in theSET+ or SET- switch on the end of thelever.

3 If the speed needs to be increased, pressthe SET+ switch. The vehicle speedwill increase as long as the SET+ switchis pressed (speed will not increaseabove the maximum programmedspeed). Release when the desired speedhas been reached.

4 If the speed needs to be decreased, pressthe SET- switch. The vehicle speed willdecrease as long as the SET- switch ispressed (speed will not decrease belowthe minimum programmed speed).Release when the desired speed hasbeen reached.

Note: The cruise control cannot be engagedat speeds below approximately30 mph (45 km/h) and engine speed belowapproximately 1000 rpm.

W3002499

Page 294: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Engine Start and Operation 287

DisengagingThe cruise control is disengaged if thebrake or clutch pedal is depressed, or if thecruise control switch is set to OFF. If theignition key is turned back to the accessoriesposition (I), the cruise control system willautomatically be disengaged.

Resuming Vehicle SpeedThe previously selected cruise speed isretained in the memory. When the cruisecontrol switch is pushed to the RESUMEposition, the vehicle resumes the previouslyset speed (provided vehicle speed exceedsapproximately 10 mph (15 km/h) when theswitch is pressed).

AccelerationMomentary acceleration (such as for passinganother vehicle) does not interrupt cruisecontrol operation. After passing, releaseaccelerator and let the vehicle slow to cruisecontrol speed. The previously set speed willthen be maintained without having to set theswitch to RESUME.

CAUTION

On vehicles equipped with Eaton VORADSmartCruise, cruise control is disengagedin the event the SmartCruise system failsto operate. You must stop the truck,turn the ignition off and on, and activatethe control twice in order for the cruisecontrol to operate.

Note: Read the Eaton VORAD CollisionWarning System Driver Reference Manualbefore taking a vehicle equipped withVORAD out on the road.

Page 295: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

288 Engine Start and Operation

Fuel Tank(s)Tank Cap

DANGER

DO NOT remove the fuel tank cap nearan open flame. Diesel fuel vapors arecombustible and can cause an explosionor fire, resulting in severe personal injuryor death.

The fuel tank caps have a pressure and athermal relief function built into the cap.These functions are designed to avoid fuelspills in the event of an accident. Thepressure relief function of the safety ventingsystem has a crack pressure high enoughto retain fuel in the tank regardless of theorientation of the vehicle [5 to 8 psi (35 to55 kPa)].

The thermal relief feature is large enough tolimit tank pressure to a safe level even whenthe remaining fuel is boiling in the tank, butnot so large as to dump fuel unnecessarily.The thermal relief should respond as muchas possible to fuel temperature rather thanflame temperature.

These features are also available on theoptional lockable fuel tank cap.

In the case the cap is lost, it must be replacedwith a cap containing the same features.

W2003143

W2003144

Page 296: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Engine Start and Operation 289

FuelingAir is always present inside the fuel tanks,entering mainly through the tank ventilation.With the air being heated and cooled,condensation is formed and water is mixedin the fuel. To avoid condensation when thevehicle is parked for longer periods, fill thetanks up to 95% of capacity. Do not fill morethan that, as the fuel needs to have room forexpansion during the heat of the day.

DANGER

DO NOT carry extra fuel containers in thecab. Fuel containers, full or empty, mayleak, explode or give added fuel to a fire.Failure to follow this precaution may leadto serious personal injury or death.

DANGER

DO NOT smoke while fueling the vehicle.The glow from the cigar/cigarette canignite the diesel fuel, causing an explosionresulting in serious personal injury ordeath.

Page 297: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

290 Clutch and Transmission

ClutchGeneral

DANGER

Before starting the engine, set the parkingbrakes and place the transmission inneutral. Failure to do so can result inunexpected vehicle movement and cancause serious personal injury and death.

DO NOT allow the clutch to slip excessively.This would cause excessive heat to begenerated and the clutch will be damagedand bring on premature failure. As soon asthe vehicle is moving, remove the foot fromthe pedal for complete clutch engagement.Once the clutch is fully engaged, heat andwear does not affect it.

DO NOT shock load the drive line throughrapid engagement of the clutch. Extremecare should be taken when driving heavyloads up hills. Always use the lowest gearwhen starting out under adverse conditions.

When operating a vehicle equipped with aclutch brake, the clutch pedal should not bedepressed more than halfway to the floorwhile shifting, except when the vehicle is at astop. To re-enter the low gear from neutral orreverse, or to enter reverse gear from neutralor low, the clutch should be depressed all theway to engage the clutch brake. This stopsthe rotation of the transmission input shaftand provides an easy, quiet gear engagement.

Page 298: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Brakes 291

BrakesBrake Safety Information

DANGER

DO NOT inspect or adjust parts orcomponents in the brake system withoutsetting the parking brake, placing thetransmission in neutral and securelychocking the wheels. If the vehicle is notsecured to prevent uncontrolled vehiclemovement, it could roll and cause severepersonal injury or death.

DANGER

DO NOT use replacement parts anywherein the brake system unless it conformsexactly to original specifications. Anonconforming part in your vehicle’sbrake system could cause a malfunction,leading to loss of control of the vehicleresulting in severe personal injury ordeath.

DANGER

DO NOT ride the brakes going downsteep hills. The brakes could overheat andlose their effectiveness. Always choosea low gear before going down the gradeand reduce speed to help control vehiclespeed. Losing the brakes going downhillcan lead to an accident causing seriouspersonal injury or death.

DANGER

DO NOT operate the vehicle when thereis a malfunction in the compressed airsystem. An air brake system with leaks orother malfunctions may prevent the brakesystem from operating properly. Thevehicle should not be operated until thesystem is repaired and all brake circuitsare working properly. Failure to repairthe system can lead to loss of control ofthe vehicle resulting in severe personalinjury or death.

DANGER

The brake system is a critical vehiclesafety system. For your safety andfor those around you, follow therecommended preventive maintenancechecks. If any problems occur, havethem investigated immediately by anauthorized service facility. Failure toproperly maintain the brake system canresult in compromised brake efficiencyand may lead to loss of control of thevehicle resulting in severe personal injuryor death.

DANGER

DO NOT drive through deep water. Thebrake system can be affected so thebraking efficiency is less or the brakespull the vehicle to one side. This couldlead to an accident, personal injury ordeath.

Page 299: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

292 Brakes

GeneralAll Volvo vehicles are designed to meet orexceed all applicable federal brake standardsand regulations. They use a dual circuit,compressed air system. It consists of twoindependent brake systems that use a singleset of brake controls. Each circuit is suppliedby its own compressed air tank. Both airtanks receive compressed air from the samesupply tank (wet tank) and are chargedwith equal pressure. The two circuits areinterconnected for the parking brake system.

DANGER

DO NOT release the parking brake orattempt to move the vehicle until brakeair pressure in both circuits is at least100 psi (690 kPa). Failure to followthis procedure may lead to uncontrolledvehicle movement and cause severepersonal injury or death.

DANGER

Never release or drive a truck that hasa brake discrepancy — no matter howminor — until it has been repairedor corrected. Failure to repair brakediscrepancies can result in compromisedbrake efficiency and may lead to loss ofcontrol of the vehicle resulting in severepersonal injury or death.

Page 300: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Brakes 293

Air pressures in the two circuits aremonitored by two pressure gauges onthe right side of the instrument cluster.The primary (rear) brake circuit gauge ismarked with an “R” within a symbol andthe secondary (front) brake circuit gaugeis marked with an “F” within a symbol.The two pointers should register equal ornearly equal pressure. By observing thegauge pointers, the operator is forewarnedin the event of a pressure drop in either orboth of the circuits. See page 128 for moreinformation.

Before operating the vehicle, check the airgauges which indicate air pressure. Theyshould not register less than 65 psi (420 kPa).

Gauge 1

Gauge 2

Page 301: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

294 Brakes

Both circuits are piped into a dual brakevalve, which simultaneously applies frontand rear axle service brakes during eachbrake application. In the event of a failurein either one of the circuits, the other circuitbecomes the emergency circuit for applyingthe brakes.

W5001486

DANGER

The Master Warning Telltale and buzzeralerts of a dangerous situation. Airpressure is low and the remaining airvolume may not be enough for repeatedbraking. Failure to heed this warning canresult in loss of braking control, vehicleaccident and injury or death.

An important feature of the brake system isthat an automatic spring brake applicationdoes not take place as a result of an air lossin only one of the two circuits. In this case,brake control remains in the foot brake valve.In each air pressure gauge, there is a warninglight connected to a low pressure switchthat comes on if air pressure goes below 60psi (420 kPa). At the same time, the buzzerwill sound and the main warning telltalewill come on. This pressure drop warns theoperator to make a manual emergency stopbefore an automatic emergency stop takesplace.

W3005171

Master Warning Telltale

Page 302: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Brakes 295

Brake System ControlsThe air compressor, governor, pressureregulator valve and reservoirs are controldevices. Their function is to build up,maintain and control air pressure in thereservoirs. This is so that pressure isheld constant between the minimum andmaximum range established for air brakeoperation.

The brake valve, quick release valve, brakechambers and slack adjusters are applicationdevices. They distribute the air pressure andconvert its energy into the mechanical forcenecessary to apply or release the brakes.

Foot Brake ValveThe foot brake valve is directly connectedto the brake pedal. The valve gives aprogressive output against the pedal travel.This allows better control of the pressure inthe first half of the pedal travel. In the lasthalf of the pedal travel, the pressure outputincrease is faster.

The foot brake valve applies the servicebrakes, incorporating both the primary andsecondary air systems. The primary systemcontrols the rear brakes and the secondarysystem controls the front brakes. The footbrake valve receives air from the compressedair tanks. Air pressure is then delivered tothe wheel brake chambers as required by theamount of pressure exerted on the foot brakepedal. The brake chamber force then appliesthe wheel brakes.

Page 303: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

296 Brakes

From the operator’s viewpoint, operatingthe foot brake valve of a vehicle equippedwith air brakes differs very little fromthe operation of a conventionally brakedvehicle. Because the operation of the brakepedal requires scarcely more effort thandepressing the average throttle pedal, airbrakes are naturally much easier to control.If the driver gives full attention to thefollowing suggestions, a little experiencewill make him/her thoroughly familiar withthe air-controlled braking of this vehicle.

DANGER

Failure to observe these precautionscan result in loss of vehicle control andserious personal injury or death.

1 The best possible stop will be madewhen the first brake application is asfirm as the speed and road conditionpermit. Then, ease off as the speed isreduced. Never apply the brakes lightlyat first and increase the pressure as thespeed diminishes.

2 DO NOT fan the brake pedal. Fanninggives poor brake performance andwastes air.

3 The air brake is designed so that whenthe brake pedal is fully depressed, anemergency application results. Thisapplication should be made only in anemergency situation.

Page 304: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Brakes 297

4 In making a stop or a slow-down, allowthe transmission to remain in gear withthe throttle closed, disengaging theclutch only when engine idling speedis reached.

5 When parking the vehicle, place thetransmission in neutral and set theparking brake before shutting down theengine.

6 When descending a long grade, do notuse the service brakes too long or toooften. The brakes may overheat andlose their effectiveness.

7 Before descending a steep grade, thetransmission should be shifted intoa lower gear and the vehicle speedreduced. Other speed retarding devicesshould also be used if available (enginebrakes, retarders or trailer hand controlvalves).

Page 305: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

298 Brakes

Parking Brake/Trailer Supply ValvesTrucks/Tractors may have two air controlvalves on the instrument panel:

• Trailer Supply (red octagonal knob)• System Park (yellow diamond knob)

The System Park valve knob (yellow) shouldbe pushed in first, after sufficient air pressureis built up (apply foot brake to preventvehicle from rolling). The Trailer Air Supplyvalve knob may then be pushed in.

The Trailer Air Supply valve knob andSystem Park valve knob will automaticallypop out if the system pressure (both frontand rear circuits) drops to 25 to 35 psi (170to 240 kPa). The tractor protection valvewill then close, the tractor spring brakes willapply and the trailer emergency system willbe activated.

On vehicles equipped with the standard twovalve system, the operation of one valvetogether with the other permits the operatorto select the desired functions describedbelow:

W5001116

Red Valve(Trailer Air Supply)

Yellow Valve(System Park)

Function(Mode)

Out Out System Park

In Out Trailer Charge

In In Normal Running

Out In Bobtail

Page 306: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Brakes 299

Parking Brake ReleaseVN and VHD models have engines equippedwith engine electronic control units (EECU).These have two features that may impact thebrake system. One is the anti-stall devicein the EECU which senses torque demandand automatically controls the engine tocompensate and maintain speed. On tractorsequipped with parking brakes on only oneaxle, the anti-stall device keeps the enginefrom stalling, allowing the driver to pullaway with the brakes dragging. This mayresult in overheated brakes and damagedwheel hubs.

WARNING

Continual dragging of the brakes willcause brakes to overheat. This may leadto wheel end fire. To avoid overheating,make sure both parking brake knobs arepushed in before driving off.

W5001481

If the yellow knob is pulled out and the redknob is pushed in, a condition is createdwhere the trailer parking brakes are notapplied and only the single drive axle brakesare applied. In this condition, the vehiclecan be driven away. Therefore, it is veryimportant that the driver make sure theyellow AND red knobs are pushed in all theway before driving the vehicle.

W5001428

Correct Driving Position:Both knobs fully in

Page 307: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

300 Brakes

There is also an engine shut-down device inthe EECU that shuts down the engine after apre-programmed time in order to save fuel.This is activated when the yellow parkingbrake knob is pulled out. Therefore, somedrivers park and release the parking brakesusing only the red knob to keep the enginerunning. It is then easily overlooked that in avehicle parked with both the yellow and redknobs activated, only the red knob is pushedin by habit.

W5001429

Incorrect Parking orDriving Position

Page 308: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Brakes 301

Spring Brake For Parking

DANGER

Never leave the vehicle without beingcertain the parking brakes are set or thatother precautions are taken to prevent thevehicle from rolling. Failure to do so canresult in serious personal injury or death.

The parking brake mechanism uses springpressure as a separate power medium toapply the service brakes on the driving axles.The parking brake is released by the samecompressed air source used to apply theservice brakes. Since this brake is releasedby air pressure, the system must be chargedto at least 60 psi (420 kPa) before the parkingbrake may be released.

The parking brake spring tension is sufficientto hold a fully loaded vehicle on maximumgrades permitted on modern highways,provided the brake drums and linings are ingood condition and the brakes are properlyadjusted.

CAUTION

DO NOT use the spring parking brakesif the service brakes are hot, such asafter descending a steep grade. Also, donot use the spring parking brakes duringfreezing temperatures if the wheel brakesare wet. To do so could damage thebrakes, if hot, or may cause them to freezeduring cold weather.

If the brakes are wet, drive the vehicle in lowgear and lightly apply the brakes to heat anddry them. Allow hot brakes to cool beforeusing the parking spring brakes.

W5001430

Page 309: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

302 Brakes

There are several ways to determine if theparking brakes have been set. By pulling outthe yellow knob:

• An audible rush of air will be heardwhen the parking brake knob is pulled.The air exhausts from the park brakevalve itself and from the spring brakechambers on the rear axle(s).

• A black ring around the base of theyellow control knob will be seen.

• The engine will stall if an attempt ismade to set the vehicle in motion.

• There will be a fluctuation in the airpressure gauge needles.

• The knob cannot be pulled out anyfurther.

DANGER

DO NOT attempt in any way todisassemble or tamper with the springbrake chamber. The force stored in thespring, if suddenly released, can causeserious personal injury or death.

DANGER

DO NOT apply the parking brake whilethe vehicle is moving. The rear wheelsmay lock up causing loss of vehiclecontrol leading to an accident, personalinjury or death.

Page 310: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Brakes 303

Trailer Brake Hand Control

DANGER

The trailer hand brake control is not aparking brake valve and must not beused as one. This brake is not designedto hold the vehicle stationary. Failure tofollow these instructions can result in theunintentional movement of the vehicleand may cause personal injury or death.

DANGER

DO NOT use the trailer brake handcontrol as a parking brake. The brakescould release and the vehicle could roll,causing a vehicle accident, personalinjury or death.

The hand control valve for the trailer brakesengages the trailer brakes independentlyfrom the vehicle brakes. The valve can befully or partially engaged but in any partialposition it will be overridden by a fullapplication of the foot brake valve.

To supply air to the trailer brakes to slowthe trailer down, pull the valve handle down.The farther the handle is pulled down, themore air pressure is applied to the trailerbrakes. Releasing the self-returning handlereleases the trailer brakes.

Page 311: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

304 Brakes

Air Tanks

WARNING

When draining the air tanks, do not lookinto the area of the draining air. Dirt orsludge particles may be in the air streamand could cause eye injury.

Air tanks should be drained daily. Emptymoisture from air tanks by pulling the drainvalve wire or by opening the drain cocks.Make sure the drain cocks close properlyafter draining. The tanks should be checkedfor condensation fluid even if an automaticdrain valve is installed.

Trucks with Wabco air dryers: Periodicallydrain the purge tank to check forcontamination, water, oil etc.

W8003393

Page 312: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Brakes 305

The “121” Brake StandardThis manual refers occasionally to “121”brakes. Although some operators believe“121” only applies to vehicles equipped withanti-lock devices, the “121” standard appliesto all vehicles that are capable of on-highwayoperation.

The “121” is a Federal requirement alsocovering alterations or changes to parts orsystems related to the “121” standard oncethe vehicle has been placed in service. Theowner and operator should be aware that itis a violation for any repair facility to makeany part or component inoperative when it isrequired for “121” compliance.

Charging Air To Another VehicleThere are many methods which may beused to charge the air system of anothervehicle. Vehicles equipped with the standardtwo-valve system (trailer supply and parkingbrake) must use the following procedurewhen using the emergency trailer air line asan auxiliary air source, other than to chargethe trailer air reservoirs.

DANGER

Before working on a vehicle, set theparking brakes, place the transmission inneutral, and block the wheels. Failure todo so can result in unexpected vehiclemovement and can cause serious personalinjury or death.

1 Connect the emergency trailer air lineto the auxiliary source.

2 Start the engine.

Page 313: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

306 Brakes

Antilock Braking System (ABS)The vehicle has a standard brake system,equipped with an electronic speedmonitoring and control system, AntilockBraking System (ABS). ABS monitors wheelspeed continuously but is not involved incontrolling the wheel speed unless there is anemergency. In normal braking applications,the standard air brake system is in effect.

WARNING

For proper ABS operation, DO NOTchange tire sizes. The size of thetires installed during production areprogrammed into the electronic controlunit. Installing different sized tires couldresult in a reduced brake force, leading tolonger stopping distances or accidents.

There is a sensor installed in each wheelon a monitored axle. The sensors transmitinformation to the electronic control unit(ECU). The ECU interprets the signals andcalculates wheel speed, wheel retarding anda vehicle reference speed. If the calculationsindicate a wheel lock-up situation, a signalis sent from the ECU to the appropriate ABSmodulator valve to reduce braking pressure.During emergency braking, the modulatorvalve alternately reduces, increases ormaintains air pressure in the brake chamberto prevent wheel lock-up.

Page 314: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Brakes 307

During emergency or reduced-traction stops,fully depress the foot brake pedal until thevehicle comes to a safe stop. DO NOTPUMP the brake pedal. With the brakepedal fully depressed, the ABS will controlall wheels to provide steering control and areduced braking distance.

Although the ABS improves vehicle controlduring emergency braking situations, theoperator still has the responsibility to changedriving styles depending on the existingtraffic, road and/or weather conditions. Forexample, the ABS cannot prevent an accidentif the driver is speeding or following tooclosely on slippery surfaces.

The ABS control unit contains a self-testingprogram that is engaged each time theignition is turned on. The operator canverify the testing by listening for the ABSmodulator valves actuating twice in series.To increase the sound, hold down the footbrake pedal when the ignition is turned on.

If any of the ABS telltales come on duringdriving or do not go out after a short timeafter turning on the ignition, take the vehicleto an authorized Volvo Truck dealer to repairthe ABS or brake system. The vehicle canstill be driven with a problem in the ABSsystem. However, ABS will not be workingand the standard braking system will be ineffect.

The instrument cluster also contains an ABStelltale lamp, which indicates when there is aproblem being reported by the Trailer ABSsystem.

W3005149

ABS Malfunction Truck/Tractor

W3005148

ABS Malfunction Trailer

Page 315: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

308 Brakes

Traction Control System (TCS) (Optional)The Traction Control System (TCS) usesthe same wheel sensors as the ABS todetermine if one set of drive wheels isspinning faster than the other wheel set. Ifthe TCS determines that a wheel is spinning(with vehicle speed below 25 mph [40km/h]), it operates the brake system toapply some brake force to stop the spinningwheel(s). This puts the drive power over tothe stationary wheel(s).

If vehicle speed is above 25 mph(40 km/h), a signal is sent to the engineECU, which reduces the engine speed to beconsistent with vehicle speed. This actionhelps reduce the amount of wheel spin andgives the operator greater vehicle control.

W3000962

The TCS includes a switch to turn off thefunction. When the switch is in the OFFposition, the TCS operates normally toincrease traction if the drive wheels beginspinning. When the switch is pressed once,the TCS telltale in the instrument clusterblinks continuously, indicating that the TCSis in mud/snow mode.

The mud/snow mode increases availabletraction on soft surfaces like snow, slush ormud by slightly increasing the allowablewheel spin. This prevents the wheels fromgetting bogged down. The TCS will resumenormal operation when the TCS switch ispressed again and the TCS telltale goes outor when the ignition is turned off.

CAUTION

DO NOT engage the differential lockswhile wheels are spinning. Seriousdamage to the differential will occur. Seepage 338 for more information.

W3001336

Page 316: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Brakes 309

Vehicle Speed Retarding Devices

DANGER

When operating a tractor bobtail (withouta trailer) or on slippery roads, the enginebrake switch must be in the “OFF”position. Failure to follow this instructioncan result in loss of vehicle control andserious personal injury or death.

Note: The vehicle ABS will automaticallyturn off the vehicle speed retarding device,IF one of the sensed rear wheels is locking upas a result of vehicle speed retarding deviceoperation. The vehicle speed retardingdevice will be turned back on automaticallywhen the wheels become unlocked. Considerswitching to a lower braking level if thisoccurs frequently.

A vehicle speed retarding device (such as a“Intebrake,” “C-Brake,” “Exhaust Brake,”etc.) is not intended to bring the vehicle toa stop. A vehicle speed retarding deviceis only intended to retard the vehicle speedunder certain conditions.

Note: If a Volvo engine is equipped witha Volvo Engine Brake, the brake will notoperate with full power until the enginecoolant temperature has reached 110 F(45 C).

Note: It is normal for there to be a slightdelay in the application of a vehicle speedretarding device. When using devices of thistype, be sure to think ahead and analyzeconditions in order to use the device properly.

Page 317: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

310 Brakes

Volvo Exhaust BrakeVN, VHDThe exhaust brake is standard on the VolvoD12D engine. It is used to reduce wear onthe brake linings. The exhaust brake is mosteffective at high engine speeds (1500 to 2300rpm). The exhaust brake is automaticallydisengaged if the engine speed drops to orbelow 1100 rpm.

The exhaust brake works by containingthe exhaust gases in the exhaust manifold,thereby making the engine work against theback pressure. This provides a retardingforce on the drive wheels.

The following must be in effect for theexhaust brake to function:

• The switch is ON (down position)

• Accelerator and clutch pedals are fullyreleased

• Engine speed exceeds 1150 rpm

When the cruise control is engaged, theexhaust brake automatically engages ifthe selected cruise speed is exceeded byapproximately 5 mph (8 km/h). The exhaustbrake is then disengaged when the speed hasreturned to approximately 3 mph (5 km/h)above selected cruise speed.

Note: For both exhaust and engine brakes,use a “one gear” driving strategy whengoing downhill to keep engine speed up foreffective braking (for example: uphill in 7thgear and downhill in 6th).

W3001324

Page 318: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Brakes 311

Volvo Engine Brake (Optional)VN, VHDThe Volvo Engine Brake (VEB) has ahigher braking effect than the exhaust brake.The engine brake is most effective at highengine speeds (1500 to 2300 rpm). It isautomatically disengaged if engine speeddrops below 1000 rpm.

The engine brake function is operated byone switch in the right hand switch cluster.It works together with the exhaust brake toprovide two levels of braking power. Theswitch has three positions: OFF, LOWand HIGH. With the switch in positionLOW, only the exhaust brake is engaged.With the switch in position HIGH, both theexhaust brake and the compression brake areactivated. For the engine brake to function,the following must be in effect:

• The switch is ON• Vehicle speed over 7.5 mph (12 km/h)• Engine temperature over 110 F

(43 C)• Accelerator and clutch pedals are fully

released• Engine speed over 1150 rpm

When the cruise control is engaged, theengine brake automatically engages ifthe selected cruise speed is exceeded byapproximately 5 mph (8 km/h). The enginebrake is then disengaged when the speed hasreturned to approximately 3 mph(5 km/h) above selected cruise speed.

W3001324

Page 319: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

312 Brakes

Too Cold for Engine Brake (Volvo Engine Only)Position 2 of the engine brake should notbe switched on until the engine has becomewarm (over 110 F [45 C]). If position 2is selected and the engine is too cold, thissymbol will be shown in the instrumentcluster and the VEB is not activated.

T3009355

Page 320: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Brakes 313

Cummins Engines (Optional)Cummins Intebrake (ISX)

The Cummins Intebrake (ISX) is availablefor Cummins engines.

Cummins ISX

Standard: 3 level dash switch, providingLow (33%) medium (66%) and high (100%)levels of engine brake. The left switch is theON/OFF switch. The right switch selectsthe level.

W3005373

Cummins Intebrake, ISX 6 level Stalk LeverThis option provides a six position leverlocated on the steering column, in front ofthe wiper stalk arm. An ON/OFF switch islocated at the end of the control lever.

The six levels of engine braking are:

• 17% (stalk lever fully ’up’)• 33%• 50%• 66%• 83%• 100% (stalk lever fully ’down’)

The driver information display (DID) showsthe level selected positions in 6 and theON/OFF status.

Page 321: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

314 Brakes

Transmission RetarderVHD OnlyThe Transmission Retarder is an optionwith Allison HD and MD transmissions.It is activated by an on/off switch in theauxiliary panel and is controlled by a stalkswitch mounted in front of the wiper switch.You can set 6 different levels with the stalkswitch.

DANGER

DO NOT use the retarder on wet orslippery roads. The retarder may causevehicle to slide and cause an accidentwhich could result in injury or death.

Note: The retarder is automatically disabledwhen the ABS (antilock brake system) isactive.

Note: Vehicle brake lights are always onwhen transmission retarder is active.

CAUTION

Apply the retarder only when engine is atclosed throttle.

CAUTION

Observe transmission and enginetemperatures. Select the lowest possibletransmission range in order to maximizethe cooling system capacity and retarding.If overheating occurs, decrease the useof the retarder and use service brakesinstead. Check the retarder overtemplight.

For complete warnings and instructions,refer to your Allison Transmission manual.

W3004428

W3004405

Page 322: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Electrical System 315

Electrical System

General Safety Guidelines

WARNING

Failure to repair a malfunction in theelectrical system can result in seriousdamage due to vehicle fire. Always let anexperienced electrical technician performrepairs. Always determine the source ofthe fault; do not just treat the symptoms.

WARNING

Always wear eye protection whenworking around batteries to prevent therisk of injury due to contact with sulfuricacid or an explosion.

WARNING

Before replacing a damaged fuse, turnoff all functions for that circuit. Damageto the circuit can happen. Alwaysreplace fuses and circuit breakers withthe same current/amperage rating. Neversubstitute a fuse with foil, wire or nails.Increasing fuse or circuit breaker ratingsor substituting a fuse with foil, wireor nails may result in electrical circuitoverheating and possibly fire.

WARNING

Over-charging a poorly charged batterycan cause an explosion, which can lead toserious personal injury.

CAUTION

Attempting to work on electroniccomponents without proper equipmentcan damage internal parts with staticelectricity.

CAUTION

Today’s vehicles contain a high numberof electronic devices. It is very importantto exercise caution when working ona modern electrical system, chargingbatteries or jump starting the engine.To minimize the risk of any damage tothe electronic components, follow theprocedures below when work is beingdone to the electrical system.

CAUTION

Welding on the vehicle can damage theelectrical system or components dueto the high voltage and current spikesthat normally occur when welding. Itis preferable to avoid welding on anassembled vehicle. However, if anystructure on or in contact with thevehicle must be welded, follow therecommendations below.

Page 323: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

316 Electrical System

CAUTION

If there are other ground cables connectedto the battery (such as engine ECU,transmission ECU, etc.), disconnect thosewires first, then remove the main batteryground cable. Electronic modules maybe damaged when their ground(s) areconnected/disconnected with the mainbattery ground disconnected. Therefore,disconnect the main battery ground last.

CAUTION

DO NOT weld on the engine or enginecomponents. Welding on the engine orcomponents mounted on the engine cancause serious damage to the engine ECU.

Note: DO NOT work on the electric systemwithout proper tools and training. Repairwork to the electrical system must be doneby trained professionals. Your authorizedVolvo Truck dealer has the right tools andtrained technicians.

Page 324: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Electrical System 317

Charging SystemAn alternator with an integrated regulator isused to supply power to the vehicle electricalsystem. The charging system voltageshould be checked periodically to preventovercharging or undercharging the batteries.

W3005339

VN

Battery Box Accessfor Jump Start

DANGER

When inspecting or cleaning batteries,never smoke or expose batteries (or theareas around them) to spark or flames.The battery area may contain an explosivegas mixture that can ignite, causing anexplosion, leading to serious personalinjury or death.

WARNING

Always wear eye protection whenworking around batteries to prevent therisk of injury due to contact with sulfuricacid or an explosion.

W3005322

Page 325: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

318 Electrical System

Batteries, Access and ChargingThe battery cover may also be a base forthe cab steps. To remove the cover, unhookthe two rubber latches and lift the cover upand out. This applies to the vehicle modelswithout fairings, and the VHD vehicle.

DANGER

When installing the battery cover, makesure it is resting properly on the boxbefore fastening the latches. Faultyinstallation may cause the cover to shiftwhen the steps are used, which may leadto a fall, causing serious personal injuryor death.

W3005334

The VHD vehicle has two styles of batteryboxes available. One is covered with aplastic cover, the other cover is made ofchromed diamond plated steel.

WARNING

Battery posts, terminals and relatedaccessories contain lead compounds,chemicals known to the state of Californiato cause cancer and reproductive harm.Wash hands after handling.

W3005504

There may be up to four batteries installed.Always make sure the batteries are fastenedproperly in the box.

When disconnecting battery terminals,always disconnect the engine ECU fuse(s)first, then the ECU ground wire(s), then themain ground cable, and finally the mainpositive cable.

Reverse this order when reconnecting thecables and wires.

Page 326: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Electrical System 319

Battery Jump Startingand ChargingTo access the batteries on a vehicle equippedwith side fairings, open the fold-out fairing.On the second battery from the front thereare special, larger brass posts installed toaccept jumper cables.

When jumping batteries to start an engine,it is important that the jumper cables areconnected directly from one set of batteriesin one vehicle to the other set of batteries inthe other vehicle (unless vehicle is equippedwith optional Emergency Start System). Thisway the cranking current is carried throughthe proper starter wiring.

Note: Make sure the cables are routed underthe fairing, then connected as shown inillustration. Close and lock the fairing beforeclimbing into the cab.

Connect the jumper cables in the followingsequence:

• Good battery positive,• Dead battery positive,• Dead battery negative,• Disconnect the cables in the reverse

order.

Avoid creating sparks by making allconnections quickly and firmly.

DO NOT permit vehicles to touch each otherwhen jump starting.

DANGER

DO NOT attempt to jump-start a vehicleequipped with Delco Maintenance Freebatteries if the test indicator is lightyellow. Replace the battery instead.Jump-starting may cause battery toexplode causing skin burns from acid orserious personal injury or death.

WARNING

Always wear eye protection whenworking around batteries to prevent therisk of injury due to contact with sulfuricacid or an explosion.

W3005322

Page 327: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

320 Electrical System

Battery to Battery ChargingHigh voltage machines that are used forwork on the vehicle can do damage to theelectrical system, especially to its electroniccomponents. Welding or quick-chargingmachines subject the wiring to excessivevoltage, which may result in damageto electrical and electronic componentsanywhere on the vehicle.

CAUTION

Attempting to work on electroniccomponents without proper equipmentcan damage internal parts due to staticelectric discharges.

DO NOT work on the electrical systemwithout the proper tools and training. Repairwork to the electrical system must always bedone by trained professionals. Your VolvoTruck dealer has the right tools and trainedtechnicians.

W3002432

Battery, Low State of ChargeIf the batteries are discharged to the pointwhere they do not have enough stored energyto start the engine, they should be rechargedusing a low charge current, not to exceed14.5 to 15.0 volts.

If the vehicle needs to be started immediately,use a starting batteries charger.

DO NOT use battery chargers with very high“boosting” capability. These produce a highvoltage that may cause damage to the vehicleelectrical and electronic components.

Page 328: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Electrical System 321

WeldingBefore welding on the vehicle, electricalpower needs to be disconnected and somecomponents must also be disconnected:

CAUTION

Welding on the vehicle can damage theelectrical system or components dueto the high voltage and current spikesthat normally occur when welding. Itis preferable to avoid welding on anassembled vehicle. However, if anystructure on or in contact with thevehicle must be welded, follow therecommendations below.

CAUTION

If there are other ground cables connectedto the battery (such as engine ECU,transmission ECU, etc.), disconnectthose wires in the sequence shown,then remove the main battery groundcable. Electronic modules may bedamaged when their ground(s) areconnected/disconnected with the mainbattery ground disconnected. Therefore,disconnect the main battery ground last.

Page 329: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

322 Electrical System

Ignition OFF position.

If the vehicle is equipped with systems thathave their own electronics, including vehicleECU (VECU), ABS, air bag (SRS), gaugecluster and some transmissions, disconnecteach ECU at its electrical connectors.

Disconnect engine/starter ground fromthe chassis. This connection is locatedoutside the left hand frame rail in the enginecompartment.

Disconnect the power harness and vehicleinterface harness at the engine electroniccontrol unit (EECU).

Disconnect the electrical connections at therear of the instrument cluster.

Reposition or shield any parts that would bedamaged by high temperatures.

Page 330: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Electrical System 323

• Attach the welder ground cable as closeto the weld area as possible (6 inches orless from the place being welded).

• DO NOT connect the welder groundcable near any electronic module, suchas the EECU or its cooling plate.

• Welding cables should not be allowed tolie on, or run parallel with any wiring.

• Welding cables should not be allowedto lie near any electronic componentduring welding.

• After welding is complete and thewelded areas have cooled, inspectwiring and components for possibleshorts, nicks, abrasion or other damage.

CAUTION

DO NOT weld on the engine or enginecomponents. Welding on the engine orcomponents mounted on the engine cancause serious damage to the engine ECU.

Page 331: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

324 Electrical System

Battery Voltage Protection SystemAn electronic battery monitor in the sleepercontrol module will monitor and disconnectcertain circuits if it senses that the batteryvoltage falls below two different levels.

If the first level is reached, the sleeper controlmodule will sound a three second alarm andthe LED will start blinking. If the batteryvoltage is not raised within 30 seconds, themajority of lights in the sleeper unit will bedisabled.

If the battery voltage continues to drop andthe second level is reached, the LED willstop blinking and all remaining sleepercircuits will be disabled.

Note: The clock display will also be turnedoff.

When the batteries are charged, eitherthrough the vehicle alternator or aconnected battery charger, the monitorwill automatically restore power to thedisconnected circuits.

Unless the batteries are held at an elevatedvoltage for several hours, they will onlydevelop a “surface” charge. That charge willquickly go away and the system will retrip.

Arrow shows LED.

Battery VoltageProtection System (Optional)A Battery Protection Relay (Relay 5) isadded to the fuse and relay center. Thisrelay will disconnect Power Relay 1 andPower Relay 4, disabling certain cab circuitsin addition to those disabled by the sleepercontrol panel. This conserves battery power.

The Sleeper control module will display“Err” (error) if there is a fault with Relay 5.

W3005282

Page 332: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Electrical System 325

Electrical CenterAll the relays and fuses in the cab are located here. The cover panels are fastened withscrews that can be turned with a coin. Since the function of some fuses or relays may changefor the vehicle application, refer to the list of functions that is attached to the undersideof each panel.Most relays and fuses are accessible from under the top cover. Some relays and maxi-fusesfor higher current circuits are located behind the front cover of the dash.The vehicle has two electrical centers, one located in the middle of the dash under the topcover, and the other under the front cover. The electrical center underneath the front cover isthe power module and it feeds the fuses relays to the electrical center under the top cover.

W3005285

Page 333: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

326 Electrical System

Fuses are standard. Reset breakers areavailable as an option for some circuits.If a fuse continues to blow or disconnect,the circuit has a malfunction and must berepaired.

If a breaker trips, the ignition or main switchmust be switched off before the breakerresets.

WARNING

Failure to repair a malfunction in theelectrical system may result in a vehiclefire and personal injury.

WARNING

Always replace fuses and circuit brakerswith the same current/amperage rating.Using larger fuse or circuit breaker ratingsmay result in electrical circuit overheatingand possibly fire.

One type of fuse in the new electrical centeris termed “mini-fuse” and requires a pullertool to remove from the fuse block. DO NOTuse needle-nose pliers to remove fuses.

The puller tool is part of the Owner’sPackage. To order a new puller, use partnumber 20378326.

W3002525

Mini-fuse puller tool

Page 334: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Electrical System 327

CB Power StudsCB Studs are available either in the overheadstorage compartment, or on the dash.

The red stud is the positive terminal and theblack stud is the ground terminal.

For a proper hook-up, use fork typeconnectors on the wires or use “banana”plugs.

CAUTION

If stripped wire ends are used, make surethere are no wire strands that can bridgebetween the studs.

Before connecting any electrical accessory,make sure it is made for 12 V operation.This circuit is fused at 20A maximum. DONOT overload this circuit.

The dash top tray or the overhead radioshelf is available with an optional CB mountpower strap to hold different size radiossecurely in place.

W3005282

Page 335: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

328 Electrical System

12 Volt Power OutletsThere are a number of 12 V outlets that canbe accessed in the cab.

In the VN 780, 670 and 630 sleepers, there isa power outlet on the sleeper control panel.The outlet is covered by a cap that is pulledout for access.

Note: The cigar lighter socket is optimizedfor use with the cigar lighter heating element.This socket cannot be used as an auxiliary12 V power supply.

WARNING

The Cigar lighter is NOT intended to beused for any other purpose. Using thecigar lighter to power other items maycause a fire, and serious personal injuries.

CAUTION

DO NOT connect a device with a currentrating in excess of the amount specifiedon the fuse and relay panels.

The outlet is made for 12 V accessory-typeplug.

W3005298

Page 336: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Electrical System 329

12 Volt LocationsThere is an optional power outlet in the driver and passenger side cabinets. Accessories forthis cabinet will have ON/OFF switches of their own.The cabinet 12 V outlets are made for 12 V accessory-type plugs.

VN 780

W3005508

VN 670, VN 630

W3005500

Page 337: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

330 Electrical System

Inverter Switch - 12 V DC to 120 V ACThis switch turns ON the optionalpower inverter, located near the batterycompartment.

The power inverter takes the DC voltagefrom the batteries and changes it to ACvoltage, which is then fed to the 120 V shorepower electrical system within the cabinarea.

The power inverter option can be orderedonly if the 120 V shore power electricalsystem is specified.

1 External Power Plug2 Load Center3 Inverter (if equipped)

This is a typical setup with a factory-installedInverter.

Note: A tripped circuit is usually anindication of a fault in the circuit, or of anappliance being supplied with power. Everyeffort should be made to identify and correctany fault that exists.

W3005980

DANGER

When parked on wet ground, avoid usingan external power source to connect thecab power plug. Water is a conductor ofelectricity, in wet conditions electricalshock can occur which can result inpersonal injury or death.

Page 338: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Electrical System 331

120 Volt System and OutletsThe VN 780, 670 and 630 are availablewith an optional 120 V AC service, usedfor longer parking while still living in thevehicle. The 120 V AC service is suppliedfrom outside sources.

DANGER

When parked on wet ground, avoid usingan external power source to connect thecab power plug. Water is a conductor ofelectricity, in wet conditions electricalshock can occur which can result inpersonal injury or death.

To hook up the service, there is a socketlocated behind the driver side door.

W3005284

Page 339: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

332 Electrical System

Power goes through a circuit breaker box(see number 3 in illustration below) locatedon the front wall in the driver side luggagecompartment. On the right is an ON/OFFswitch and on the left is the ground faultcircuit interrupter.

The controls may also be reached frominside the cab through the hatch under themattress or cushion.

W3005967

VN 780

From the breaker box in the VN 780, powergoes to the three outlets as a standard feature.In the VN 670 and 630 models, the outlet onthe driver side lower bunk box is standard,and the tower cabinet middle compartments(1) each have an optional outlet.

1 120 Volt outlet2 External 120 Volt receptacle3 Circuit Breaker Box

W3005340

VN 780

Page 340: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Electrical System 333

VN 670, VN 630

W3005343

VN 670, VN 630

1 120 Volt outlet2 External 120 Volt receptacle3 Circuit Breaker Box

W3005342

Page 341: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

334 Electrical System

Changing Headlight Bulb, VNMNote: For detailed bulb replacementinformation refer to your Maintenanceand Engine Manual. See the “ElectricalSystem Maintenance” section. To preventshort service life, DO NOT touch the glasssurface of the replacement bulb.

The headlight bulb can be accessed from therear of the headlight assembly. Raise thehood and remove the cover.

Remove the terminal from the back of thebulb by bending up the lock tabs and pullingback at the same time. Turn the lock ringcounterclockwise and remove. Pull out thebulb.

W3004382

VNM

Install the bulb and line up with the locationtab by turning it and then push it in untilfully seated. Install the lock ring. Push theterminal back on. Check that the rubber sealis clean and then install cover and snap theclamps over it.

W3004383

VNM

Page 342: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Electrical System 335

Changing Headlight Bulb, VNLNote: For detailed bulb replacementinformation refer to your Maintenanceand Engine Manual. See the “ElectricalSystem Maintenance” section. To preventshort service life, DO NOT touch the glasssurface of the replacement bulb.

The headlight bulb can be accessed from therear of the headlight assembly. Raise thehood. In early production vehicles, removethe bulb cover by turning clockwise.

In later production vehicles, the cover canbe removed in the normal counterclockwisedirection.

Note: In some cases, the cover seal maystick to the housing, which makes removaldifficult. Use special tool 85104355 to assistin removal. Contact your authorized Volvodealer for the tool.

With the cover removed, grasp the bulbassembly and turn counterclockwise toremove. Disengage the wiring connector andremove the bulb from the vehicle.

Engage the wiring harness connector to thereplacement bulb assembly. Install into theheadlamp housing. Check the bulb cover sealand install the bulb cover. Lower the hoodand check for proper headlamp operation.

W3005350

1 Low beam Headlight(cover installed)

2 High beam Headlight(cover removed)

Page 343: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

336 Power Steering

GeneralThe VN power steering consists of anintegrated gear. The VHD vehicle has boththe intergrated gear and the hydraulic powercylinder. There is also a power steeringpump with fluid container. The pump, drivenby the engine, provides hydraulic pressureto the power steering. If the engine is notworking, the steering is only manual. Withthe power steering not working, the effortrequired to turn the steering wheel is muchgreater than with power assist. If the powersteering assist fails, bring the vehicle to asafe stop. DO NOT drive the vehicle untilcorrecting the cause of the problem.

While operating the vehicle, avoid ruts andobstructions which cause a binding conditionon the sides of the front wheels. Drive thevehicle out of the rut, then turn the steeringwheel. If possible, avoid turning the wheelswhile the vehicle is at a standstill as thisplaces a considerable load on the powersteering system and front axle.

Page 344: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Power Steering 337

Periodically check the power steering fluidreservoir and keep it filled to the properlevel with the recommended fluid. Seethe “Operator’s Manual, Maintenance andEngine” for more information.

W6001505

Adjustable Steering Column

The adjustment device is operated by apedal on the left side of the floor. To makeadjustments, press the pedal down and movethe steering column to the desired position,then release the pedal.

DANGER

DO NOT try to make adjustments tothe steering wheel while the vehicleis moving. Never operate the vehiclewith the steering wheel adjusted to itsuppermost position (exiting cab position).Make all adjustments before starting thevehicle, to prevent loss of vehicle control,which can cause personal injury or death.

Page 345: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

338 Axles and Wheels

AxlesDifferential LocksThe drive axle(s) may be equipped withdifferential locks. The single drive axle willonly have a wheel differential lock. Withtandem drive axles, there could be bothwheel differential locks and an inter-axledifferential lock.

CAUTION

Never operate the vehicle with thedifferentials locked any longer than isnecessary, as this places a great strain onthe axles and may cause rapid tire wear.

The differential lock should be used on icyor slippery surfaces. As soon as the slipperysurface has been passed, the differential lockshould be disengaged.

Differential locks must not, under anycircumstances, be engaged when in awheel-spin situation. Engage the locks aheadof the slippery area. If already slipping,stop the wheels, engage the locks andthen continue. If the differential locks areengaged when the wheels are spinning, thedifferential will be damaged and the rearaxle drive unit could possibly fail.

All efforts must be made to avoid spinningthe wheels at high speeds on slipperysurfaces. This is true whether the differentiallocks are engaged or not. Excessive wheelspin may result in failure of the cluster gearsand other components found within the rearaxle housing(s). If you are unable to obtaintraction, engage the differentials locks asdescribed above. If you are still unableto move the truck, seek assistance from aqualified tow operator."

Page 346: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Axles and Wheels 339

Engaging the differential locks must alwaysbe done as follows (see “Dash OverviewVN” page 96 and “Dash Overview VHD”page 98 for switch location):

1 Depress the clutch pedal. Wait for thedrive wheels to stop spinning

2 Engage the differential lock3 Engage a suitable gear4 Carefully release the clutch pedal

Under normal traction conditions, do notengage the differential locks. If at allpossible, do not use the differential lockswhile taking a curve. With good traction andthe differential locks engaged, the vehiclewill be understeered and therefore will tendto drive straight in a curve. When using lockson good traction surface, drive cautiouslyand do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).Disengage the locks as soon as possible.

When the differential locks are disengaged,the couplings may be under tension.Disengage the locks by returning theswitch to the OFF position. Help with thedisengagement by briefly letting up on theaccelerator to relieve the torque on thecouplings.

DANGER

DO NOT drive on dry, paved surfacewith the differential locks engaged. Thevehicle will strive to maintain a straightline. Taking a curve with the differentiallocks engaged may cause an accident,leading to serious personal injury ordeath.

W3001991

W3000904

Page 347: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

340 Axles and Wheels

Auxiliary Lift Axle VHD

Page 348: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Axles and Wheels 341

DANGER

Before raising or lowering any of theauxiliary axles, be certain no one can betrapped by the axle movement. Failureto do so can result in a person beingtrapped between the wheel and the body,or between the wheel and the ground,resulting in serious personal injury ordeath.

Vehicles may be equipped with auxiliary liftaxles. The lift mechanism operates with airpressure. Press the top part of the switch into raise the axle and press the lower part ofthe switch in to lower the axle.

W3005503

Pusher Axle

W3005507

Tag Axle

Regulators for adjusting the air springpressure are located on the outside of the cab,below the rear corner of the driver side door.Regulators are operated by turning the knobcounter clockwise for lowering pressure, andclockwise for increasing pressure.

CAUTION

DO NOT rely on gauges to determineaxle pressure. Weight must be verifiedon scales, and pressure in the air springsshould then be adjusted accordingly.

W7001173

Page 349: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

342 Axles and Wheels

WheelsGeneralDue to the size, equipment needed and theprocedures used to change wheels, thisshould be done through the Volvo Truckdealer. By having an expert technicianperform this procedure, personal injury andproperty damage may be avoided.

Note: When replacing the wheel equipmentor tires, use the same size wheels or tires asoriginally manufactured. Changing the tireor wheel size will affect brake performance.If changing tire size, ABS and speedometermust be recalibrated.

Check Tightening Wheel Nuts

DANGER

Failure to properly torque-tighten thewheel nuts can result in the breakageof wheel studs and the subsequent lossof wheels. Loss of vehicle control andserious personal injury or death can occur.

Check tighten all wheel nuts after the first 50to 100 miles (80 to 160 km) and the first 50to 100 miles (80 to 160 km) after each tireservice. This applies to both single and dualwheels in connection with normal servicebut should be performed at least every sixmonths.

This check tightening is particularlyimportant when rims or brake drums arenewly painted. Paint can flake off from thesesurfaces, causing the nuts to lose their gripand the wheel to loosen.

See the “Operator’s Manual, Maintenanceand Engine” for correct procedures ontightening the wheel nuts.

W7000774

Page 350: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Axles and Wheels 343

Inflating TiresAlways check inflation pressures when thetires are cool, using an accurate tire pressuregauge. Check the pressures at regularintervals.

CAUTION

Never bleed the air from hot tires.Increased tire pressure measured in a hottire is normal. Lower than recommendedpressures may cause side wall flexingresulting in increased tire heat. This maycause premature tire failure.

W7001270

DANGER

Tires and wheels must be serviced only bya qualified technician. DO NOT attemptto perform this work yourself. Inflatedtires on wheels contain compressed airand if suddenly released, do so with anexplosive force. Serious personal injuryor death can occur.

For specific information and warranty onrims and tires, contact the tire manufacturer’sdistributor. Check tires for abnormal wear.Also, check the tread depth.

Page 351: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

344 Axles and Wheels

Wheel Bearing AdjustmentFor reliable operation and adequate servicelife, the wheel bearings must be properlyadjusted and checked during the serviceperiod. Loose wheel bearings could causepremature tire wear and possibly affectvehicle handling. See your authorized VolvoTruck dealer for proper servicing.

Watch carefully for oil leaks and listen forunusual noises. These are indications ofworn bearings, bad seals or misadjustedbearings. These are problems which must becorrected as soon as possible.

DANGER

Failure to keep wheel bearings properlyadjusted may result in accelerated tirewear, poor handling and, in extremecases, wheel separation from the hub orfrom the spindle.It is important that wheel bearings arechecked and adjusted regularly. Failureto properly maintain these bearings canultimately result in loss of vehicle controland cause serious personal injury or death.

W7001271

Page 352: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Fifth Wheel Instructions 345

Fifth WheelGeneral InformationThe standard fifth wheel is manufactured byASF. Other fifth wheels available as optionsare Holland and Fontaine.

Things to think about with trailer hook-up:

• Check the load distribution betweenaxles.

• Always chock the trailer wheels.

• Grease the plate. No grease on the platewill produce heavy steering.

• Verify visually that coupling hasoccurred.

• Verify visually that plungers havelocked on slider.

• Check for slack between the 5th wheeland the trailer kingpin.

DANGER

Always have all fifth wheel maintenanceand repairs done by a qualified technician.An incorrect repair can cause the trailerto separate from the tractor causing anaccident with serious personal injury ordeath.

Page 353: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

346 Fifth Wheel Instructions

Fifth Wheel Kingpin Lock ReleaseSwitch Operation:

DANGER

Activation of the kingpin lock releaseswitch ONLY unlocks the kingpinlatch mechanism. To relock the latchmechanism, you MUST pull forward andthen back up to re-engange the kingpinlock mechanism. Failure to follow theseinstructions can result in separation of thetrailer from the tractor causing personalinjury or death.

W3005511

• Park the vehicle and apply parkingbrake for tractor trailer.

• Put gearshift in neutral and chock trailerwheels.

• Lower trailer landing gear to ground.

• Disconnect air/electric lines to tailer.

• To release the fifth wheel kingpin lock,push the switch up. This will release thelocking mechanism. Once activated, theswitch will not relock the fifth wheelkingpin locking mechanism.

• Release parking brake and drive tractor12 inches away from the kingpin.

• Deflate air suspension by pressingbottom of suspension switch.

• After suspension lowers, pull clear oftrailer and reinflate suspension. See:“Suspension Dump, VN” page 114.

• The fifth wheel kingpin lock will onlyrelock if you follow the completerecoupling procedures. See: “TrailerCoupling Procedures” page 352.

Page 354: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Fifth Wheel Instructions 347

Safety InformationFollow the instructions on the advisory labelsattached to the various manufacturers’ fifthwheels. An operator’s manual for each fifthwheel is provided in the Owner’s package.

W9000183

If the fifth wheel is equipped with a slidingmounting, follow the advisory labelsattached to the component. Also, read theliterature provided by the manufacturer.

W9000185

DANGER

Always keep the fifth wheel plate welllubricated to prevent binding between thetractor and trailer. A binding fifth wheelcould cause erratic steering and loss ofvehicle control that may result in seriouspersonal injury or death.

W9000198

Page 355: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

348 Fifth Wheel Instructions

Fifth WheelThere are three operating positions for thefifth wheel locking mechanism (ASF fifthwheel is shown as a typical fifth wheel):

Locked — This is the position that the fifthwheel will be in with a trailer hooked up.In the locked position, the operating rodis retracted and the safety latch will freelyswing back and forth.

W9000180

Lockset — This is the position the fifthwheel is in when uncoupling the trailer. Toachieve the lockset position, the operatingrod is pulled out with a slight upward motion.The operating rod shoulder will catch onthe plate casting. The safety latch is rotatedtoward the rear of the fifth wheel.

W9000242

Open — This is the position the fifth wheelis in after the trailer is uncoupled. The jaw isopen and the operating rod is now droppeddown and can be freely moved around. Thesafety latch is rotated toward the rear of thefifth wheel. This is the position the fifthwheel must be in when being coupled to atrailer.

W9000203

Page 356: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Fifth Wheel Instructions 349

Fifth Wheel Slider (Optional)The fifth wheel comes standard with an airoperational slider. To remain within legalweight limits, this feature allows the driverto distribute the load easily on the axles.

The air operated slider takes the work out ofadjusting the tractor for various trailer loads.The fifth wheel portion is easily adjusted,even with a fully loaded trailer connected.

Movement between the adjustable saddleplate and the stationary base plate railcan result in wear, causing longitudinal,latitudinal and vertical slack. Field repairscan be made to reduce this slack foradditional service life.

W9000205

Page 357: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

350 Fifth Wheel Instructions

Unlocking the Fifth WheelAlways check out the entire fifth wheelbefore attempting to couple to a trailer (ASFfifth wheel is shown):

• If not lubricated properly, add grease tothe top of the fifth wheel plate.

• Make sure the mounting of the fifthwheel to the frame is tight and in goodcondition.

• If using a sliding fifth wheel, makesure the slide locking plungers are ina locked position.

The following instructions are for preparingthe fifth wheel for coupling to a trailer:

Rotate the safety latch toward the rear of thefifth wheel.

W9000180

Using a slight upward motion, pull theoperating rod out until the operating rodshoulder is outside the fifth wheel operatingslot.

W9000202

Page 358: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Fifth Wheel Instructions 351

When the shoulder of the operating rodis outside of the operating slot, raise theoperating rod handle to its maximum upwardposition.

W9000242

Release the operating rod. The uppershoulder of the operating rod should now bein contact with the plate casting above theoperating slot. The fifth wheel is now in thelockset position and a trailer can be coupled.

W9000274

Page 359: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

352 Fifth Wheel Instructions

Trailer Coupling ProceduresThis procedure covers vehicles with andwithout air suspension.

DANGER

It is important that the operatingprocedures contained in this manual arefully understood and closely followed.Failure to properly couple the tractorand trailer can result in their separation,causing death and property damage.

Using the following procedures, inspect theequipment before coupling to a trailer:

Make sure the fifth wheel is properlylubricated and the jaw is in the open position.

W9000659

WARNING

If the jaw is not in the open position, usea pry bar to rotate the jaw to the openposition. The lock is spring loaded. Keephands away to avoid injury.

Use a pry bar to open the fifth wheel jaw, ifnecessary.

W9000660

Make sure the plate is tilted downward to theproper position at the rear.

W9000236

Page 360: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Fifth Wheel Instructions 353

Make sure the mounting of the fifth wheelto the tractor frame is tight and in goodcondition.

If using a sliding fifth wheel, make sure theslide locking plungers are fully engaged.

W9000205

Chock the trailer wheels. Use two chocks(both on the front and rear of the wheel) onboth sides of the trailer.

W9000263

Back up close to the trailer, centering thekingpin on the throat of the fifth wheel, andSTOP.

Note: For tractors with air ride suspension,make sure the suspension control switch is inthe “RIDE” position (switch pushed in at thetop) and the air springs are inflated.

W3001341

Page 361: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

354 Fifth Wheel Instructions

Connect the air brake lines and the electricalpower cord. Make sure that any slack in thelines is supported so that the brake lines donot become entangled. Set the trailer brakesby pulling out the Trailer Supply control onthe dashboard.

W3005321

Check to see that the trailer is at the properheight for coupling. The leading edge of thetrailer plate should initially contact the fifthwheel top plate surface about 8 in.(200 mm) behind the pivot point as thetractor backs under the trailer. Raise or lowerthe trailer landing gear as required to obtainthis position.

Back under the trailer, keep the trailerkingpin centered in the throat of the fifthwheel. After picking up the trailer — STOP— then continue backing until the fifth wheellocks firmly on the kingpin. Stopping helpsprevent hitting the kingpin too hard.

As an initial check, pull forward to test thecompleteness of the coupling.

CAUTION

Attempting to couple with the trailer at animproper height could result in a false orimproper couple and cause damage to thetractor, fifth wheel and trailer.

W9000237

Page 362: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Fifth Wheel Instructions 355

A direct visual check is required to ensureproper coupling. Several types of impropercouplings will pass the initial pull test.Sound is not reliable. Do not take for grantedthat you are properly coupled. Get out of thecab and look.

DANGER

To ensure a positive hook-up or coupling,these procedures should be followed inevery case.A trailer that is not connected correctlymay disconnect from the tractor while inmotion, resulting in an accident, personalinjury or death.

W9000286

Failed trailer coupling

Make sure the trailer kingpin is in the jawslot and that the jaw is closed behind the pin.The kingpin should not overhang the fifthwheel or be caught in the grease groove.

To verify that the kingpin is actually in thefifth wheel slot and the jaw is closed, the pinmust be visually inspected from the rear.Use a flashlight if necessary.

W9000181

Make sure the trailer bed is resting on the topsurface of the fifth wheel plate, and that thereis no visible gap between the fifth wheel andthe trailer bed plate.

W9000240

Page 363: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

356 Fifth Wheel Instructions

Make sure the operating rod is fully retracted,the safety latch is positioned above thehandle, and the latch swings freely.

If the fifth wheel is equipped with a manualsecondary lock, check to see that it isproperly engaged.

Note: If you cannot get a proper coupling,repeat this procedure. DO NOT use any fifthwheel which fails to operate properly.

DANGER

To ensure a positive hook-up or coupling,these procedures should be followed inevery case.A trailer that is not connected correctlymay disconnect from the tractor while inmotion, resulting in an accident, personalinjury or death.

W9000180

Check the kingpin to fifth wheel clearanceby moving the tractor backward and forwardwith the trailer brakes set. If the clearanceappears excessive (more than1/8 in. [3 mm]), or if the jaw does not lock,the fifth wheel should be inspected by aqualified technician before proceeding.

Wind up the trailer landing gear (trailersupport) to its fully retracted position. Folddown or remove the crank handle and placeit in the crank handle holder.

Check the air brake lines and the trailer lightcord connections.

Remove the wheel chocks from the trailerwheels.

DANGER

Proper pick-up and coupling to a trailer isa serious matter. A trailer that becomesdisconnected while in motion is extremelydangerous to other traffic and may resultin death or severe personal injury. Toensure a positive hook-up or coupling, theprocedures above should be followed inevery case.

Page 364: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Fifth Wheel Instructions 357

Trailer Uncoupling ProceduresFor Tractors With Air Ride Suspension:Set the system park brake on the tractor.

Set the trailer brakes by pulling out the trailerair supply knob.

W5001433

Chock the trailer wheels. Use two chocks(one on the front and one on the rear of thewheel) on both sides of the trailer.

W9000203

Wind down the landing gear until it touchesthe ground and then give it a few extra turnsin low gear. Do not raise the trailer off ofthe fifth wheel. Fold down or remove thecrank handle and place it in the crank handleholder.

Note: In poor ground conditions, it may benecessary to provide a stable base for thelanding gear.

Page 365: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

358 Fifth Wheel Instructions

Disconnect the light cord and air brake lines.Use the dummy air couplings to keep foreignmaterial from entering the brake lines.

Unlock the fifth wheel.

Note: If the operating rod is too difficult topull, back the tractor up slightly to relieveany kingpin load against the fifth wheel jaw.

W9000275

Release the tractor park brakes and pull thetractor away from the kingpin about12 in. (300 mm) and STOP. Do not allowthe fifth wheel to leave the underside of thetrailer.

W9000239

Select the “UNCOUPLE” position (pushdown the latch and press in the bottom partof the switch) on the suspension controlswitch to deflate the air springs.

W3001341

Page 366: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Fifth Wheel Instructions 359

Wait about 30 seconds for the air springs todeflate.

W9000238

With the suspension lowered, pull clearof the trailer and immediately select the“RIDE” position (press the top part of theswitch in) on the suspension control. Thisrestores the suspension to operating height.

CAUTION

The vehicle must never be driven withthe air springs deflated. Damage to airsuspension parts will occur if springs arenot inflated properly.

W3005319

After the trailer is uncoupled, the fifth wheelwill be in the open position. The operatingrod will drop and can be moved aroundfreely.

W9000203

Page 367: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

360 Fifth Wheel Instructions

For Tractors Without Air Ride Suspension:Set the system park brake on the tractor.

Set the trailer brakes by pulling out the trailerair supply knob.

W5001433

Chock the trailer wheels. Use two chocks(both on the front and rear of the wheel) onboth sides of the trailer.

W9000263

Wind down the landing gear until it touchesthe ground and then give it a few extra turnsin low gear. Do not raise the trailer off ofthe fifth wheel. Fold down or remove thecrank handle and place it in the crank handleholder.

Note: In poor ground conditions, it may benecessary to provide a stable base for thelanding gear.

Page 368: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Fifth Wheel Instructions 361

Disconnect the light cord and air brake lines.Use the dummy air couplings to keep foreignmaterial from entering the brake lines.

Unlock the fifth wheel.

Note: If the operating rod is too difficult topull, back the tractor up slightly to relieveany kingpin load against the fifth wheel jaw.

W9000275

Release the tractor park brakes and slowlydrive the tractor out from under the trailer.Let the trailer slide down the fifth wheel andpickup ramps.

W9000239

After the trailer is uncoupled, the fifth wheelwill be in the open position. The operatingrod will drop and can be moved aroundfreely.

W9000203

Page 369: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

362 Fifth Wheel Instructions

Operating the Fifth Wheel Slider

CAUTION

The trailer must be stopped and thetrailer brakes locked, or damage to thetractor and/or trailer may result fromuncontrolled sliding of the fifth wheel.

Stop the tractor and trailer in a straight lineon level ground.

Lock the trailer brakes by pulling out theTrailer Supply knob.

Release the slide locking plungers by movingthe switch to the “UNLOCK” position (pressdown the latch and push in the bottom partof the switch).

W3001346

Check to see that both of the slide plungershave released. If the plungers do not comeout, lower the landing gear to relieve thepressure on the plungers. Lowering thelanding gear will also allow the fifth wheelto slide easier.

W9000205

Page 370: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Fifth Wheel Instructions 363

Slowly drive the tractor forward or backwardto position the fifth wheel.

After sliding the fifth wheel to the desiredposition, engage the slide locking plungersby moving the cab switch to the “LOCK”position (press in the top part of the switch).

W3001346

CAUTION

DO NOT operate the vehicle if theplungers are not fully engaged and thetrailer landing gear is not fully retracted.Doing so may cause damage to the tractor,trailer and landing gear.

Visually check to see that the slide plungersare fully engaged. It may be necessaryto leave the trailer brakes locked and tomove the tractor slightly to engage the slideplungers into the rail.

Wind up the trailer landing gear to its fullyretracted position.

W9000205

Page 371: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

364 Emergency Information

Towing ProcedureGeneral

CAUTION

The driveshaft must be removed beforetowing the vehicle. Failure to remove thedriveshaft may result in damage to thetransmission.

Remove the drive shaft from the rear axlebefore moving the vehicle, unless it onlyneeds to be moved a small distance forsafety reasons. When the transmission isdriven from the rear wheels without theengine running, there is no lubrication in thetransmission.

Axle shafts must be removed if the vehicle isto be towed at speeds over 25 mph(40 km/h) or for a long distance. Openingsshould be covered to prevent loss of oil andentry of dirt and grit. Where oil-lubricatedbearings are used, openings should bethoroughly sealed with metal discs and newgaskets before towing.

T0006670

Page 372: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Emergency Information 365

WARNING

If a vehicle with air suspension is liftedby the rear frame member, there is arisk that the air springs will separatefrom the spring plates. When towinghas been completed, DO NOT underany circumstances use your hands toreposition the air springs. There is a greatrisk that your hand will be caught betweenspring and plate causing personal injury.

WARNING

DO NOT tow a vehicle backwards whenequipped with roof air fairings. Thefairings act as an air scoop and maybreak off. Failure to follow this warningmay lead to personal injury and vehicledamage.

WARNING

Vehicles with air fairings are tall. Makesure that the total height of the vehicle,when it is raised up behind the wrecker,does not exceed the maximum allowedheight for local underpasses. Failureto follow this instruction may lead topersonal injury and vehicle damage.

The vehicle may now be towed. It isrecommended that a wrecker with a lift baris used since the service brakes will notfunction. The system must be filled with airto release the parking brake or follow themechanical spring brake caging procedureson page 368.

Note: The power steering does not functionwhen towing a vehicle with a disabledengine.

Page 373: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

366 Emergency Information

Towing Instructions

CAUTION

If the vehicle becomes disabled, it is veryimportant to tow it properly. Failure todo so can cause damage to the frame andbody parts. Follow the instructions belowto avoid damage.

In the event that the vehicle cannot bereached to place the wrecker lift bar underthe front axle, use the tow eyes supplied withthe vehicle. The front tow eyes are used asa point at the front of the vehicle where thevehicle can be pulled.

DANGER

DO NOT use the tow eyes for raisingthe front of the vehicle; the tow eyes canbreak. DO NOT crawl under a vehiclesuspended by tow eyes. Failure to followthese instructions can result in seriouspersonal injury or death.

On day cab models, the tow eyes are storedbolted to the back of the cab wall.

On sleeper cab models, the tow eyes arestored bolted to the back wall of the luggagecompartment wall.

W8003124

Page 374: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Emergency Information 367

The tow eyes are held in place whenmounted on the front of the vehicle by tractorpins. These pins are stored in the tow eyemounting holes when not being used.

CAUTION

If the vehicle has the optional rock guardinstalled, insert the lock pin into thetow hook from the opposite side duringinstallation.

In the new model VN trucks if the truck hasthe optional rock/stone guard installed, thenthe driver will have to insert the lock pin intothe tow hook from the opposite side duringinstallation.

W8003186

When the vehicle is located properly, lift thefront and locate the lift bar under the frontaxle and secure. Using the front axle fortowing minimizes the possibility for damageto the vehicle body, frame and suspension.

Note: When the drive shaft or axle shafts arereinstalled, make sure the nuts are tightenedto the correct torques. Also make sure theaxle shafts are installed in the proper sides,with the left shaft in the left side and theright shaft in the right side.

W9000588

Page 375: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

368 Emergency Information

Towing PintleNote: If your vehicle is equipped with apintle hook system installed by Volvo TrucksNorth America, please note that the entirepintle hook system –including the frameand attachment to the frame– is rated at amaximum capacity of 4000 lb.

DANGER

DO NOT exceed the maximum towingcapacity of the pintle hook system(4,000lb.). Exceeding the maximumtowing capacity may result in vehicleaccident, serious Injury or death.

W7001269

Arrow shows Pintle Hookadvisory label

Caging Spring Brake ChambersThe parking spring brake chambers maybe released mechanically if there is nocompressed air available.

DANGER

Always start by chocking the wheels toprevent the vehicle from rolling. Failureto do so can result in unexpected vehiclemovement and serious personal injury ordeath can occur.

Page 376: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Emergency Information 369

Remove the plastic plug in the front end ofthe chamber. Remove the screw from theholder in the side of the brake chamber.Insert the screw into the front hole and pushin until it bottoms. Screw into the cylinderso at least 4 to 6 threads have entered.

Install the washer and nut. Tighten the nut.This compresses the brake chamber springand releases the parking brake.

DANGER

DO NOT attempt in any way todisassemble or tamper with the springbrake chamber. If the force stored on thespring is suddenly released, it can causeserious personal injury or death.

W5001430

Page 377: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

370 Emergency Information

Towing Procedure — AIRTEK® Suspension®HENDRICKSON recommends that avehicle equipped with a STEERTEK axlebe towed using the following methodsfor ON HIGHWAY or ON ROADWAYapplications. Methods listed are in order ofpreference.

1 Wheel lift method, the ideal towingprocedure

2 Axle fork method3 Towing vehicle from the rear method4 Spring eye and hanger lift method

®HENDRICKSON is not responsible forany damage to the axle, suspension or othervehicle components resulting from anytowing method or fixture not authorized by®HENDRICKSON.

Please contact ®HENDRICKSON Tech.Services with any questions regarding propertowing procedures for vehicles equippedwith a STEERTEK axle.

WHEEL LIFT METHODThis method provides the greatest ease fortowing the vehicle. Lifting at the tires helpsreduce the risk of possible damage to theaxle, suspension, and engine componentsduring towing operations. See illustration.

W7001300

Page 378: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Emergency Information 371

AXLE FORK LIFT METHODThis is an alternative method for towing thevehicle, but it requires SPECIAL forks, (seeillustration showing designated lift points.The following procedure must be used:

Note: When lifting a vehicle with an underlift boom, care must be taken not to damagethe engine’s oil pan. It may also be necessaryto remove the front fairing.

• Place a block of wood on top of theboom and lift the vehicle in order toplace spacers under tires. This willprovide sufficient room under the axleto locate forks in the proper position.

• Install the fork in the boom properlywith the angled arm of the fork facingforward.

• Position the forks directly under thecenter of the bottom axle wraps, and liftvehicle. The indentions in the centerof the wrap will locate the forks andmaintain their position.

CAUTION

DO NOT tow the vehicle from the axle.Towing the vehicle by the axle will causescarring and resultant damage to the axleand void warranty.

• When securing the vehicle to the boom,use (preferably) nylon safety straps.Chains have a tendency to bind and maycause damage to the axle.

W7001301

Page 379: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

372 Emergency Information

TOWING VEHICLE FROM THE REAR METHODThis method is preferred when the properequipment is not available to perform thewheel lift method or the axle fork method,and is necessary for wreckers not equippedwith an under lift system.

SPRING EYE AND HANGER LIFT METHOD

This method is permitted for under liftequipped units, caution must be taken not todamage the leaf spring, (see illustration forproper installation).

• Inspect the ends of the spring cradlesfor burrs or sharp edges that coulddamage spring.

• When securing the vehicle to the boom,use (preferably) nylon safety straps.Chains have a tendency to bind and maycause damage to the axle.

Note: When lifting a vehicle with the underlift boom (see illustration) care must betaken not to damage the engine oil pan. Itmay be necessary to remove front fairing. Ifnecessary, place a block of wood between thetop of the boom and the bottom of the axle.

W7001302

Page 380: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Emergency Information 373

Off Roadway Towing Method

WARNING

When a truck is disabled and equippedwith a STEERTEK axle, care must betaken to ensure there is no damage to thesuspension when towing the vehicle.The use of a tow strap is necessary to towa disabled truck into a repair facility. Thetow straps should be connected to the towhooks provided by the manufacturer atthe front of the bumper. If the use of towhooks is not an option, then a tow strapmay be wrapped around the front axle (seeillustration) in a manner that is acceptablefor towing the vehicle into the shop.DO NOT use a tow chain around the frontaxle to tow the vehicle, doing so willdamage the axle and void warranty. Seeillustration.

THE FOLLOWING METHODS INTHESE ILLUSTRATIONS ARE NOTRECOMMENDED FOR ON HIGHWAYTOWING

W7001303

Nylon straps are acceptable foronly Off roadway towing.

W7001304

Chains are not acceptable for Offroadway towing.

Page 381: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

374 Service Information

Service Assistance and ManualsYour authorized Volvo Truck dealer istrained and equipped to perform expertservice on your Volvo vehicle. Your dealerhas direct access to Volvo Trucks NorthAmerica, Inc. for technical help, parts orservice information.

There is also a direct number to Volvo ActionService (VAS), staffed 24 hours a day, if youare in need of assistance. The number to theCustomer Support Center is:1 (800) 528–6586 [or (800) 52–VOLVO].Also on the internet:www.vas.volvo.com

VAS offers:

DeliveryAssurance

If you need roadsideassistance, VAS canarrange for loadforwarding or equipmentrental.

PersonalAssurance

Trained staff for handlingany vehicle problems.

UptimeAssurance

VAS will locate thenearest service providerand guarantee payment soyou can get on the road assoon as possible.

PriceAssurance

VAS audits service andparts billing to ensureguaranteed labor rates andpreferred parts pricing forVolvo components.

To order a single Service Manual or a ServiceManual Set for your vehicle, contact yourauthorized Volvo Truck dealer.

In order to handle the request correctly, youmust give the model, year and VIN (last sixdigits of VIN only).(For VIN location, see page 31).

Service Manual prices will vary dependingon the make and model of engine in thevehicle. ( A Cummins engine manualis included in your introductory owner’spackage).

Note: Please allow 30 days for delivery ofManual.

Page 382: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Service Information 375

Name Company

Address

CSZ (Province, Postal Code)

Vehicle Model Phone/Fax

Model Year VIN

Item 1:

Item 2:

Item 3:

Item 4:

Item 5:

Page 383: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to
Page 384: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Index 377

IndexA

Acknowledging Messages ............ 139Additional Safety Features ............. 73Air Conditioning Electronic ClimateControl .......................................... 191Air conditioning Manual ClimateControl .......................................... 197Air distribution .............. 196, 200, 203Air Dryers ..................................... 304Air Filters, Cab ............................. 208Air Tanks ....................................... 304Airbag ............................................. 86Alarm Clock .................................. 157Alternator ...................................... 317Antenna Multiplexer ..................... 252Antennas ....................................... 251Antilock Braking System (ABS) .. 306Application Air Pressure Gauge ... 126Automatic fire alarm (smokedetector) ........................................ 250Auxiliary Lift Axle(s) ................... 341Auxiliary Switches ........................ 119Axle Serial Number Locations,Volvo ............................................... 33Axle Temperature (Front/Rear) .... 153Axles and Wheels ......................... 338

BBacklight ............................... 159, 172Battery Jump Start ........................ 319Battery Voltage ............................. 153Battery Voltage Protection System 324Battery Voltage Protection System(Optional) ...................................... 324Beacon Light, VHD ...................... 110Behind Cab Entry ........................... 49Bench Passenger Seat ................... 226Black Panel ................................... 158Blind Spots ........................................ 5Bobtail Operation .............................. 6Brake System Air Pressure Gauge 128Brake System Controls ................. 295Brakes ........................................... 291

Brakes, General ............................. 292Bumper, Front VN ............................ 8Bunk Access ................................. 232Bunk Restraints ............................... 76Bunk, Sleeper ................................ 229

CC-Brake ......................................... 106Cab Entry ........................................ 48Cab Interior and Sleeper ............... 229Caging Spring Brakes ................... 368Canadian Customer Complaints ..... 12CB Electrical Power Studs ............ 327CB-Radio ...................................... 257CD-Changer .................................. 254Central locking ................................ 39Changing password ....................... 173Changing Settings ......................... 142Cigar Lighter ................................. 118Clock format ................................. 170Cluster Self Test ............................ 177Clutch and Transmission .............. 290Clutch Operation ........................... 290Cold Weather Operation ............... 273Collision Warning System,VORAD .......................................... 94Comfort Clip ................................... 85Communication and Entertain-ment .............................................. 251Contrast ......................................... 171Coolant Temperature Gauge ......... 125Cooling system ............................. 125Cruise Control ............................... 286Current Gear Position ................... 151Curtains ......................................... 249

DDaily Maintenance Checks ............. 69Datalog .......................................... 181Date Format .................................. 170Deluxe Seat Features .................... 222Diagnostics ................................... 176DID ............................................... 143Diff. Lock Switch ......................... 113

Page 385: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

378 Index

Differential Locks ......................... 338Display Adjust .............................. 171Display Screen .............................. 211Display Setting .............................. 169Distance ........................................ 169Distance to Destination ................. 157Distance to Empty ......................... 155Door lock ........................................ 35Door Locks ..................................... 34Door Operation ............................... 36Downhill Operation ...................... 284Driver Information Display ........... 143Driver Information Display (DID) 143Driving Light Control, VNM ........ 117Driving Menu ................................ 151

EElectric System, 120 V ................. 331Electrical Center ........................... 325Electrical System .......................... 315Emergency Information ................ 364Emissions Control Compliance ...... 14Engine Air Control ....................... 113Engine Brake ................................ 106Engine Break-In ............................ 278Engine Cold Start, Volvo .............. 270Engine Idling ................................ 281Engine Jump Start ......................... 320Engine Operation .......................... 277Engine Overspeed ......................... 280Engine Serial Number Location, Volvoengine .............................................. 33Engine Shut-Down System ........... 279Engine Start and Operation ........... 265Engine Start Procedure ................. 265Engine Stopping ............................ 268Engine-Mounted PTO ................... 102Entering the Cab ............................. 48Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA) . 157Ether Start ..................................... 272Exhaust Brake ............................... 106

FFan Speed ...................................... 109Fastening Safety Belt ...................... 75Fault Diagnostics .......................... 176Favorite Display ............................ 158

Favorite Display Setting ............... 159Fifth Wheel Instructions ............... 345Fifth Wheel Slider ......................... 349Fifth Wheel Slider Operation ........ 362Fifth Wheel Unlocking ................. 350Fifth Wheel, General .................... 345Fleet ID ......................................... 175Fleet Limits ................................... 174Fog light Control, VNM ............... 117Fog lights, VNL ............................ 117Foot Brake ..................................... 295Frame Alterations ........................... 13Front Brake System Air PressureGauge ............................................ 128Front-Engine Mounted PTO ......... 102Fuel Consumption ......................... 170Fuel Economy Driving .................. 258Fuel Level Gauge .......................... 126Fuel Parking Heater ...................... 218Fuel Tank Caps ............................. 288Fueling .......................................... 289

GGear Position Current ................... 151General Information .......................... 1

HHeadlight Bulb Changing VNL .... 335Headlight Bulb Changing, VNM .. 334Heated rear view mirrors ................ 37Heater Only ................................... 201Heating and Air Conditioning ...... 191High Altitude Operation ............... 285Hood Latch, VNM 200 Day Cab, ShortFairing ............................................. 53Hood Opening ................................. 53

IIdle Adjustment ............................ 282Idle Shutdown ............................... 283Idling ............................................. 281Ignition Switch .............................. 269Info Display .................................. 158Information messages ................... 133Inspecting Safety Belts ................... 79Instantaneous Gallons Per hour .... 155Instrument

Page 386: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Index 379

Gauges .................................. 123Instrument Cluster ........................ 143Instruments and Controls ................ 95Instruments, Overview .................... 95Intake Manifold Pressure Gauge ... 123Intebrake ....................................... 106Interior lights ................................ 242Inverter Switch .............................. 330Isringhausen Comfort SeatFeatures ......................................... 221Isringhausen Standard SeatFeatures ......................................... 220

JJump Start ..................................... 319Jump Starting Engine .................... 320

LLanguage ....................................... 169Licence Plate, VN ............................. 8Light Control Panel ....................... 116Lock ................................................ 39Lock the doors ................................ 39

MMarker Interrupt Switch ................ 109Memory Settings, Deluxe Seat ..... 222Messages ....................................... 133

NNational Comfort Seat .................. 225National Standard Seat ................. 224Night Mode ................................... 172Night/Day ..................................... 159Noise Emissions .............................. 22

OOil level ......................................... 180Oil Level ....................................... 154Oil pressure gauge ........................ 124Outside Temperature ..................... 152Overload ............................................ 7Owner Information, General ............. 1Owner’s Information Package .......... 4

PParking Brake ............................... 298Parking Heater ...................... 214, 217Parking Spring Brake .................... 301Part number ................................... 178

Password ....................................... 187Performance Bonus ....................... 189Power Outlets, 12 V ...................... 328Power Outlets, 120 V .................... 331Power rear view mirrors .................. 37Power Steering .............................. 336Power Steering, General ............... 336Power Studs .................................. 327Power Take-off .............................. 101Power windows ............................... 38Pre-Trip Inspection and DailyMaintenance .................................... 55Pressure Automatic Suspension .... 153PTO Speed Adjustment ................ 104Pusher Axle ................................... 341Pyrometer Gauge .......................... 127

RRadio ............................................. 254Raise Hood ...................................... 53Rear Brake System Air PressureGauge ............................................ 128Rear view mirrors ........................... 37Rear view mirrors, electric heating . 37Recirculation ................. 191, 197, 201Reset (Driving Mode DID) ........... 160Reset trip data ............................... 185Road Relay .................................... 257Roadside Assistance ..................... 374Rock guard .................................... 367Rock/Stone Guard ......................... 367Roof Deflector ................................ 10Roof Extender ................................. 10

SSafety Belt Replacement ................. 84Safety Belts ..................................... 73Safety Defects, Reporting ............... 12Safety Equipment ............................ 93Safety Guidelines, ElectricalSystem ........................................... 315Safety Guidelines, Fifth Wheel ..... 347Safety Information, Brakes ........... 291Seat, National ................................ 224Seats .............................................. 219Selecting a Menu .......................... 141Selling Vehicle .................................. 1

Page 387: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

380 Index

Service Assistance ........................ 374Service Information ...................... 374Service Manuals ............................ 374Side Engine Twin Turbo MountedPTO ............................................... 103Side Engine-Mounted PTO ........... 102Sink in Sleeper .............................. 244Sleeper Bunk Restraints .................. 76Sleeper Bunks ............................... 229Sleeper Curtains ............................ 249Sleeper Section ............................... 51Sliding 5th Wheel Switch ............. 115Smoke detector ............................. 250Snow Plow, VHD .......................... 110Speedometer ................................. 123Spring Brake Chambers, Caging .. 368SRS Airbag ..................................... 86Stalk Switch Control Lever ........... 145Static Passenger Seat, Tubular ...... 228Steering Column, Adjustable ........ 337Steering Wheel Controls ............... 112Stereo ............................................ 254Stop messages ............................... 133Storage, Front Overhead ............... 237Storage, VN 670, 630 ................... 240Storage, VN 780 ........................... 238Suspension Dump Switch ............. 114

TTable In VN 780 ........................... 241Tachometer .................................... 123Tag Axle(s) ................................... 341TCS Switch ................................... 110Telephone ...................................... 257Television ...................................... 255Temperature .................................. 170Temperature, Engine Oil ............... 152Temperature, Transmission Oil ..... 152Time and Date ............................... 156Time/Distance ............................... 156Tire Inflation ................................. 343ToolBox Seat, Isringhausen .......... 227

Total data ....................................... 182Towing Information, General ........ 364Towing Procedures ........................ 366Traction Control System (TCS) .... 308Trailer Brake Hand Control .......... 303Trailer Coupling Procedures ......... 352Trailer Supply Valve ..................... 298Trailer Uncoupling ........................ 357Transmission Retarder .................. 314Transmission-Mounted PTO ......... 101Trip Average Speed ....................... 157Trip data ........................................ 183Trip Fuel Used .............................. 155Tubular Seat .................................. 228TV Antenna .................................. 256

UUnits .............................................. 169Uphill Operation ........................... 284

VVehicle Access ................................ 34Vehicle ID ..................................... 181Vehicle Messages .......................... 160Vehicle Settings ............................ 174Vendor Component Information ....... 1Ventilation ..................................... 205Voltmeter Gauge ........................... 127Volvo Action Service .................... 374Volvo Link Compass ..................... 154VORAD Collision Warning System 94

WWabco Air Dryers ......................... 304Warning messages ......................... 133Warning, freezing conditions ........ 141Welding On Frame .......................... 13Welding Precautions ....................... 13Wheel Bearings ............................. 344Wheel Nuts ................................... 342Windshield Washer Capacity .......... 71Winterfront .................................... 276

Page 388: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Truck Model & Serial

Engine Model & Serial

Transmission Model & Serial

Rear Axle Model & Serial

Your Truck Was Delivered By:

If you need assistance on the road or if you need

service repairs, contact the VAS support center.

VAS is available 24 hours per day, 7 days per

week at 1-800-528-6586.

Please report the specific nature of the service

problem to the Volvo Customer Support

Specialist, who will answer your questions and

arrange for the assistance you need.

Volvo Action Service (VAS)

Support Center

1-800-52-VOLVO

Page 389: OPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD -  · PDF fileOPERATOR'S MANUAL VN, VHD. ... Electrical System ... Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time or to

Volvo Trucks North America, Inc.P.O. Box 26115 Greensboro, NC 27402-6115

Volvo Trucks Canada, Ltd.5600A Cancross Court, Mississauga, Ontario L5R 3E9

http://www.volvotrucks.volvo.com

PV776-20570119 (USA) 01.2004 © Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. , 2004